US20060172781A1 - Short-range cellular booster - Google Patents
Short-range cellular booster Download PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20060172781A1 US20060172781A1 US11/369,231 US36923106A US2006172781A1 US 20060172781 A1 US20060172781 A1 US 20060172781A1 US 36923106 A US36923106 A US 36923106A US 2006172781 A1 US2006172781 A1 US 2006172781A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- unit
- user
- network
- signal
- repeater according
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Granted
Links
Images
Classifications
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/14—Relay systems
- H04B7/15—Active relay systems
- H04B7/155—Ground-based stations
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/14—Relay systems
- H04B7/15—Active relay systems
- H04B7/155—Ground-based stations
- H04B7/15528—Control of operation parameters of a relay station to exploit the physical medium
- H04B7/15542—Selecting at relay station its transmit and receive resources
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B17/00—Monitoring; Testing
- H04B17/40—Monitoring; Testing of relay systems
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/14—Relay systems
- H04B7/15—Active relay systems
- H04B7/155—Ground-based stations
- H04B7/15528—Control of operation parameters of a relay station to exploit the physical medium
- H04B7/15535—Control of relay amplifier gain
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/24—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field for communication between two or more posts
- H04B7/26—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field for communication between two or more posts at least one of which is mobile
- H04B7/2603—Arrangements for wireless physical layer control
- H04B7/2606—Arrangements for base station coverage control, e.g. by using relays in tunnels
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/14—Relay systems
- H04B7/15—Active relay systems
- H04B7/155—Ground-based stations
- H04B7/15564—Relay station antennae loop interference reduction
-
- H—ELECTRICITY
- H04—ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
- H04B—TRANSMISSION
- H04B7/00—Radio transmission systems, i.e. using radiation field
- H04B7/14—Relay systems
- H04B7/15—Active relay systems
- H04B7/155—Ground-based stations
- H04B7/15564—Relay station antennae loop interference reduction
- H04B7/15585—Relay station antennae loop interference reduction by interference cancellation
Definitions
- the existing cellular networks such as (Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) and IS95, are intended to provide a contagious and continuous coverage, so as to support the high terminal mobility expected from such systems.
- GSM Global System for Mobile Communications
- IS95 IS95
- indoor (in-building) coverage, or the coverage of places with high shadowing attenuation (e.g. tunnels) of such networks is often “patchy”, with “coverage Holes” at best, and no coverage at worst.
- the reason for the impaired indoor coverage is that the cellular base stations are usually placed outside buildings, higher than the average building heights, to provide large area coverage.
- the signal may be adequate at “street-level”, it is severely attenuated by the building material, reducing the signal power in-building, resulting in the poor converges.
- Loss of signal power depends on the building material and can be tens of dBs for each wall penetration. The problem is exacerbated in the 3 rd generation systems such as Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) and cdma2000, as these new systems have the capability of high data transmission, which results in lower information bit energy (E b ), and much reduced link budget and cell foot-print.
- WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
- cdma2000 3 rd generation systems
- E b information bit energy
- the repeater solution although cheaper than a base station, has several drawbacks. These outdoor repeaters are still too expensive for a private user, and involve careful planning. Most use large directional antennas, or additional backhaul frequencies to reduce antenna gain specifications, which results in lower spectral efficiency and are capacity limited.
- the repeaters often cause increased interference in the network, as they are outdoor devices, similar to base stations, and hence are not popular as a viable solution for providing high performance indoor coverage.
- the indoor repeaters are still cheaper than the outdoor version, but typically involve installation of high directional antennas on the roof, and ensured antenna isolation, creating costly demand for skilled installation and operation. Therefore, the system generally remains too complicated for an unskilled user and not sufficiently inexpensive for usage in a very localized coverage area.
- a repeater mediates traffic between a network transceiver and a user transceiver in a wireless communication system.
- the repeater comprises a network unit that maintains a network link with the network transceiver, a user unit that maintains a user link with the user transceiver, a two-way communication pathway between the network unit and the user unit; that facilitate the communication of signals between the network transceiver and the user transceiver in autonomous repeater hops between the network transceiver and the network unit, between the user transceiver and the user unit, and between the network unit and the user unit, and a gain controller that compensates for propagation losses between the network unit and user unit alone.
- FIG. 1 is a schematic block diagram illustrating an embodiment of a cellular network with two base stations
- FIG. 2 is a schematic block diagram depicting an embodiment of a forward-link part of a repeater
- FIG. 3 is a schematic block diagram showing an embodiment of a reverse-link part of a repeater
- FIG. 4 is a schematic block diagram illustrating an embodiment of a system including a Network unit and a User unit;
- FIG. 5 is a schematic block diagram that illustrates an embodiment of a system including a Network unit implementing antenna diversity
- FIG. 6 is a schematic block diagram depicting an embodiment of a repeater that uses two antennas for antenna diversity
- FIGS. 7-11 are flow charts depicting embodiments of system operation flow for a network unit ( 7 - 9 ) and a user unit ( 10 - 11 );
- FIGS. 12 and 13 are schematic block diagrams showing embodiments of digital repeater implementations
- FIG. 14 is a schematic block diagram showing an embodiment of an analog implementation of a back-to-back repeater
- FIG. 15 is a schematic block diagram showing an embodiment of a digital implementation of a back-to-back repeater
- FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing an embodiment of operation flow of a back-to-back repeater
- FIGS. 17 and 18 are a simplified block diagram to illustrate a channel filtering operation
- FIGS. 19-22 are schematic block diagrams showing other repeater embodiments.
- the system disclosed herein provides better, and localized indoor coverage without causing excess interference in the network, usage of costly equipment or network planning.
- the system increases the overall network capacity, reducing the mobile and BTS transmit power, increasing the battery life and reducing the “harmful” radiation to the user.
- GSM Global System for Communications
- WCDMA Wideband Code Division Multiple Access
- 802.11a, b, and g wireless LAN systems
- the operating frequency can be at any desired part of communications spectrum used for mobile communications (e.g.
- PCS 1900, or DCS1800 or GSM900 or UMTS 2000, ISM or UNII band The description here is only intended as an example and as such utilization of the booster is not only limited to the in-building coverage and can be used in other places such as trains, planes, cars, tunnels, etc. Also, the example may not include all minute or unimportant design details. Units and sub-units discussed and explained hereafter meet regulations of the respective licensed and unlicensed band of operation. Therefore, for the different example implementations and embodiments disclosed, specifications including maximum transmit power, spectral mask, out of band radiation, and others for transmitters, receivers, repeaters and boosters, are met for both licensed and unlicensed bands of operation.
- FIG. 1 shows a cellular network 100 with two base stations (BTS 1 ( 101 ) & BTS 2 ( 102 )).
- a typical network supports more than two base stations.
- the disclosed system may be applied in any size network, regardless of the supported number of base stations.
- BTS 1 101 is connected to Base Station Controller BSC 1 107 .
- BTS 2 102 is connected to Base Station Controller BSC 2 108 .
- BTS 2 102 can also be connected to Base Station Controller BSC 1 107 , instead of BSC 2 108 .
- BSC 1 107 is connected to Mobile Switching Center MSC 109 .
- BSC 2 108 is connected to MSC 109 , or instead may be connected to another MSC in the network.
- MSC 109 is connected to PSTN 110 .
- BTS 1 101 has an associated coverage area 103 .
- BTS 2 102 has an associated coverage area 104 .
- These coverage areas may or may not overlap. However, usually the network is planned such that there is considerable overlap, to facilitate handoffs.
- the mobile terminal 105 is inside building 106 , in the coverage area 103 communicating with BTS 1 101 , using a traffic channel transmitted at around frequency f 1 in the forward-link and its associated reverse-link frequency, f 1 ′.
- the traffic channel can be one of the available time slots on the BCCH carrier, or may be on a TCH carrier, where frequency hopping may be used to reduce interference.
- Mobile terminal 105 may or may not be in coverage area 104 , but the mobile unit 105 is well within the coverage area 103 and average signal power from BTS 1 101 is much stronger than the average signal power from BTS 2 102 , within the building 106 , and the locality of mobile unit 105 .
- Root-mean-square (rms) forward-link signal level ⁇ 1 outside the building 106 is higher than the rms signal level ⁇ 2 inside the building by the wall penetration loss ⁇ .
- the loss a may be such that ⁇ 2 is not at sufficiently high level for the User unit 105 to maintain reliable communication with BTS 1 101 , or BTS 2 102 , or both BTS 1 101 and BTS 2 102 .
- the signal level ⁇ 2 may be such that mobile unit 105 may have difficulty to setup and maintain a communication link with BTS 1 101 or BTS 2 102 , or both BTS 1 101 and BTS 2 102 , or the communication link does not have the desired performance and reliability, in all or some of the in-building areas.
- the coverage problem inside the building 106 may be solved by more transmit power from BTS 1 101 in the down-link to combat the signal loss, by the wall penetration loss, a.
- the r.m.s. reverse-link signal level ⁇ 1 inside the building 106 is higher than the r.m.s. signal level ⁇ ′ 2 , outside the building, by the wall penetration loss ⁇ ′.
- the loss ⁇ ′ may be such that ⁇ ′ 2 is not at sufficiently high level for the User unit 105 to maintain reliable communication with BTS 1 101 , or BTS 2 102 , or both BTS 1 101 and BTS 2 102 .
- the signal level ⁇ ′ 2 may be such that mobile unit 105 may have difficulty to setup and maintain a communication link with BTS 1 101 or BTS 2 102 , or both BTS 1 101 and BTS 2 102 , or the communication link does not have the desired performance and reliability, in all or some of the in-building areas.
- the coverage problem inside the building 106 may be solved by more transmit power from mobile unit 105 in the up-link to combat the signal loss, by the wall penetration loss, ⁇ ′.
- the forward and reverse link frequency pairs are sufficiently close, such that a level is substantially similar to ⁇ ′ level.
- FIG. 2 depicts a forward-link part 230 of the repeater 200 .
- the forward-link portion 230 in a simple form supplies improved indoor coverage by boosting the signal level in building in the forward-link of the cellular network.
- BTS 1 213 has a BCCH radio channel (beacon channel) transmitted substantially close to f 1 .
- BTS 1 213 is in communications with the mobile unit 214 at a frequency substantially close to f 1 (the BCCH carrier frequency) or another carrier frequency, f 2 , that may or may not be frequency hopping. There may or may not be other frequencies that are transmitted by BTS 1 213 , or other base stations in the same area, which are not shown in the FIG. 2 .
- the device has two separate units, the “Forward-link Network unit” 201 , which is placed where good signal coverage exists, indoor or outdoors, and the “Forward-link User unit” 202 , which is placed where good signal coverage does not exist, indoor or outdoors.
- the Forward-link Network unit 201 is connected to an antenna 203 , tuned to operate at the cellular network operating frequency band.
- the Forward-link Network unit 201 is also connected to an antenna 204 tuned to operate at a suitable Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure (known as U-NII) bands, where the system is designed to operate at U-NII spectrum bands.
- U-NII Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure
- the system can also be designed to operate at Unlicensed Personal Communications Services (U-PCS) band or at Industrial, Scientific and Medical (ISM) band of frequencies.
- U-NII Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure
- the choice of the unlicensed frequency depends on the design of the equipment and the system specification. Frequencies defined in the portion of the radio spectrum known as U-NII bands may be implemented in some embodiments. Some design modifications are useful, for ISM band operation. The modifications are related to the minimum spreading factor of 10 specified for the ISM band operation, and the maximum allowed transmit power. If the system is designed to operate in ISM band, the signal may use further spread spectrum modulation/demodulation and other modifications to meet FCC 47 CFR Part-15, subpart E specifications.
- the “Forward-link User Unit” 202 is connected to an antenna 205 tuned to operate in the same frequency band as antenna 204 , which is U-NII band in some embodiments.
- the Forward-link User unit 202 is also connected to an antenna 206 tuned to operate at the cellular network operating band.
- Antenna 203 is connected to a (Low Noise Amplifier) LNA unit 207 , which is further connected to a bandpass filter 232 .
- LNA unit 207 may be a high performance amplifier, with a typical gain of 15 dB and a noise figure of 1.5 dB with sufficient bandwidth to cover the appropriate portion of the spectrum.
- the bandpass filter 232 can be designed to pass all or a desired part of the interested cellular spectrum, or can be a bank of overlapping bandpass filters, covering the full spectrum of the interested cellular system, with a RF switch, such that the desired band and bandwidth can be selected.
- the bandpass filter 232 is connected to frequency converter 208 .
- the frequency converter 208 is capable of converting the cellular network operating spectrum band to a desirable part of the U-NII spectrum, and includes components such as mixers and filters for correct operation.
- the frequency converter 208 is connected to the Forward-link Network unit transmitter 209 .
- the transmitter unit 209 is designed to operate in U-NII band and conforms to the FCC 47 CFR Part-15, subpart E regulations, and can be as simple as a single amplifier operating at the desirable U-NII operation band, or more complex transmitter with amplifiers and filters, or even a WLAN transmitter such as 802.11a.
- the transmitter unit 209 is connected to antenna 204 .
- Antenna 205 is connected to the Forward-link User unit receiver 210 , which is designed to receive the signal transmitted by unit 201 .
- the receiver 210 which is connected to frequency converter 211 , can be as simple as a single LNA operating at desirable U-NII band of device operation, or it can be better designed with additional functionalities such as variable attenuator and variable channel select filters, or even a WLAN receiver such as 802.11a (where the transmitter part of 802.11a is used in the Network unit 209 ).
- Frequency converter unit 211 which is connected to receiver unit 210 and variable gain amplifier unit 212 , converts the input signals, from U-NII band, to the cellular network operating frequencies, and includes all components such as mixers and filters for correct operation.
- the frequency converter unit 211 performs the opposite conversion operation of the frequency converter unit 208 , and includes all components such as mixers and filters for correct operation.
- the frequency converter 211 is connected to the Variable Gain (VG) amplifier 212 , operating at the cellular network operating frequency band.
- the variable gain amplifier 212 is connected to antenna 208 .
- Antenna 208 will be transmitting signals with substantially similar frequencies to the frequencies transmitted by base station 213 , and meets cellular system specifications.
- the signal radiated by antenna 208 which is an amplified repeated version of the original incident signal received by antenna unit 203 , will experience some loss in the power level, before returning and re-entering the antenna 203 again.
- the re-entered signal into antenna 203 is termed “Down-link Returned-Signal” hereafter.
- the Down-link Returned-Signal path loss is the Down-link Returned-Signal path loss, and is termed here as the “Down-link System Path Loss” and referred to as PL d1 .
- the “Down-link System Link Gain”, which is here referred to as G d1 , is defined as “the ratio of the r.m.s. signal value at the input to the antenna 208 terminator, to the r.m.s. signal value, at the antenna 203 terminator, where the Down-link System Path Loss, PL d1 , as defined above, is infinite (i.e. no EM coupling path between antenna 208 and antenna 203 ), and all the system and propagation path delays (from antenna 203 , through the system to antenna 208 ) are removed”.
- dg d1 all values of PL d1 , G d1 , and dg d1 are all in dB.
- the value of dg d1 ranges from 0 to PL d1 , and can be assumed to be 3 dB for the purposes of the description here. However, it is possible to select better values for dg d1 , where the system performance is optimized further.
- FIG. 3 depicts an embodiment of the reverse-link part 330 of a repeater 300 .
- the reverse-link portion 330 in a simple form improves indoor coverage by boosting signal level in building in the reverse-link of the cellular network to such level that attains acceptable link performance.
- BTS 1 302 has a BCCH radio channel (beacon channel) transmitted substantially close to f 1 , and a frequency pair, f′ 1 on the reverse-link.
- BTS 1 302 is in communications with the mobile unit 324 at a frequency substantially close to f′ 1 (the BCCH carrier frequency) or another carrier frequency, f′ 2 , that may or may not be frequency hopping. There may or may not be other frequencies that are transmitted by BTS 1 302 , or other base stations in the same area, which are not shown in the FIG. 3 .
- the device has two separate units, the “Reverse-link Network unit” 326 , which is placed where good signal coverage exists, indoor or outdoors, and the “Reverse-link User unit” 328 , which is placed where good signal coverage does not exist, indoor or outdoors.
- the Reverse-link Network unit 326 is connected to an antenna 304 , tuned to operate at the cellular network operating frequency band.
- the Reverse-link Network unit 326 is also connected to an antenna 312 tuned to operate at a suitable Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure (U-NII) bands, where the system is designed to operate at U-NII bands.
- U-NII Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure
- the system can also be designed to operate at Unlicensed Personal Communications Services (U-PCS) band or at Industrial, Scientific and Medical (ISM) band of frequencies.
- the choice of the unlicensed frequency depends on the design of the equipment and the system specification. Frequencies defined in the portion of the radio spectrum known as U-NII bands may be used in some system designs. Some design modifications are used for ISM band operation. The modifications are related to the minimum spreading factor of 10 used for ISM band operation, and the maximum allowed transmit power. If the system is designed to operate in ISM band, the signal uses further spread spectrum modulation/demodulation and other modifications to meet the FCC 47 CFR Part-15, subpart E specifications.
- the “Reverse-link User Unit” 328 is connected to an antenna 314 tuned to operate in the same frequency band as antenna 312 , which is U-NII band for example.
- the Reverse-link User unit 328 is also connected to an antenna 322 tuned to operate at cellular network operating band.
- Antenna 322 is connected to a LNA unit 320 , which is further connected to a bandpass filter 321 .
- LNA unit 320 may be a high performance amplifier with a typical gain of 15 dB and a noise figure of 1.5 dB with sufficient bandwidth to cover the appropriate portion of the spectrum.
- the bandpass filter 321 can be designed to pass all or a desired part of the cellular spectrum, or can be a bank of overlapping bandpass filters, covering the full spectrum of the interested cellular system, with a RF switch, such that the desired band and bandwidth can be selected.
- the bandpass filter 321 is connected to frequency converter 318 .
- the frequency converter 318 is capable of converting the cellular network operating spectrum band to a desirable part of the U-NII spectrum, and includes all components such as mixers and filters for correct operation.
- the frequency converter 318 is connected to the Reverse-link User unit transmitter 316 .
- the transmitter unit 316 is designed to operate in U-NII band and conforms to the FCC 47 CFR Part-15, subpart E regulations, and can be as simple as a single amplifier operating at the desirable U-NII operation band, or a more complex transmitter with amplifiers and filters or even a WLAN transmitter such 802.11a.
- the transmitter unit 316 is connected to antenna 314 .
- the desired portion of the U-NII band of operation for the reverse-link part of the booster is different to the desired portion of the U-NII band of operation for Forward-link part of the booster, and sufficiently apart, so that no substantial interference is experienced from the operation of one link, to the other.
- Antenna 312 is connected to the Reverse-link Network unit receiver 310 , which is designed to receive the signal transmitted by unit 328 .
- the receiver 310 which is connected to frequency converter 308 , can be as simple as a single LNA operating at desirable U-NII band of device operation frequency, or it can be better designed with additional functionalities such as variable attenuator and variable channel select filters or even a WLAN receiver such as 802.11a (where the transmitter part of 802.11a is used in the User unit 316 ).
- Frequency converter unit 308 which is connected to receiver unit 310 and variable gain amplifier unit 306 , converts the input signals, from U-NII band, to the cellular network operating frequencies, and includes all components such as mixers and filters for correct operation.
- the frequency converter unit 308 performs the opposite conversion operation of the frequency converter unit 318 .
- the frequency converter 308 is connected to the variable gain amplifier 306 , operating at the cellular network operating frequency band.
- the variable gain amplifier 306 is connected to antenna 304 .
- Antenna 304 will be transmitting signals with substantially similar frequencies to the frequencies transmitted by mobile unit 324 .
- the signal radiated by antenna 304 which is an amplified repeated version of the original incident signal received by antenna unit 322 , will experience some loss in the power level, before returning and re-entering the antenna 322 again.
- the re-entered signal into antenna 322 is termed “Up-link Retumed-Signal” hereafter.
- Up-link Returned-Signal path loss is the Up-link Returned-Signal path loss, and is termed here as the “Up-link System Path Loss” and referred to as PL u1 .
- the “Up-link System Link Gain” which here is referred to as G u1 , is defined as “the ratio of the r.m.s. signal value at the input to the antenna 304 terminator, to the r.m.s. signal value, at the antenna 322 terminator, where the Up-link System Path Loss, PL u1 , as defined above, is infinite (i.e. no EM coupling path between antenna 304 and antenna 322 ), and all the system and propagation path delays (from antenna 322 , through the system to antenna 304 ) are removed”.
- the variable gain amplifier unit 306 gain is set such that Up-link System Link Gain, G u1 , is less than the Up-link System Path Loss, PL u1 , by dg u1 , so as to avoid a “positive feed-back” loop in the system, i.e. G u1 ⁇ PL u1 ⁇ dg u1 ( dB )
- dg u1 all values of PL u1 , G u1 , and dg u1 are in dB.
- the value of dg u1 ranges from 0 to PL u1 , and can be assumed to be 3 dB for the purposes of the description here. However, it is possible to select better values for dg u1 , where the system performance is optimized further.
- G u1 level is substantially similar to Gd u1 level
- PL u1 level is substantially similar to PL d1 level
- dg u1 level is substantially similar to dg d1 level.
- the unique booster unit identity code and optionally the device location can be transmitted to the cellular network.
- the information can be used to locate a user in an indoor environment, for example by generating a heavily coded (protected), low bit rate data containing a long known preamble, the unique identity code, optionally the longitude, and the latitude of the reverse-link Network unit 326 .
- the information can then be pulse-shaped for low spectral leakage and superimposed on the reverse-link signal of a given channel by an appropriate modulation scheme, within the reverse-link Network unit 326 .
- the choice of the modulation scheme depends on the operating cellular system. For example, for GSM, which enjoys a constant envelope modulation such as GMSK, amplitude modulation (with low modulation index) can be used. For CDMA systems with fast reverse-link power control, DBPSK can be used as the modulation scheme. Extraction of information from the received channel signal at base station may involve base station receiver modifications, but does not effect the normal operation of the cellular link.
- FIG. 4 shows an embodiment of a system 500 including the Network unit 502 , together with the User unit 504 in the same diagram.
- the Forward-link Network unit 514 ( 201 in FIG. 2 ) and the Reverse-link Network unit 516 ( 326 in FIG. 3 ) are now in one unit, referred to hereafter as the Network unit 502 .
- the Forward-link User unit 518 ( 202 in FIG. 2 ) and the Reverse-link User unit 520 ( 328 in FIG. 3 ) are now in one User unit, referred to hereafter as the User unit 504 .
- the transmit/receive antenna 203 in FIG. 2 and transmit/receive antenna 304 in FIG. 3 are replaced by a single antenna 506 and duplex filter 528 .
- the duplex filter unit 528 is designed for optimum performance, and meets specifications for cellular operation. Also, the transmit/receive antenna 204 in FIG. 2 and transmit/receive antenna 312 in FIG. 3 are replaced by a single antenna 508 and duplex filter 526 . Further, the transmit/receive antenna 205 in FIG. 2 and transmit/receive antenna 314 in FIG. 3 are replaced by a single antenna 510 and duplex filter 524 in FIG. 4 . Equally, the transmit/receive antenna 208 in FIG. 2 and transmit/receive antenna 322 in FIG. 3 are replaced by a single antenna 512 and duplex filter 522 in FIG. 4 . The duplex filter unit 522 is designed for optimum performance, and complies with specifications for cellular operation.
- GSM system is a FDD system, and as such reverse-link frequencies are different to that of the forward-link frequencies.
- a duplex filter provides appropriate functionality.
- the duplexers 528 and 522 can be replaced by hybrid combiners or “circulators”.
- duplexers 526 and 524 are still used, since forward-link and reverse-link frequencies in the U-NII band are kept separate (i.e. FDD).
- a coaxial cable such as RG58 or IS inch heliax
- up-conversion to U-NII bands is superfluous, and the system can operate with the Forward and reverse-link signals kept at original cellular frequencies.
- the described booster system typically operates satisfactorily in limited scenarios. To ensure the correct operation of the booster system in all propagation and operating conditions, several features may be included in the system design.
- Illustrative advanced features include design solutions that are useful in countering the enumerated problems.
- FIG. 5 shows a system 600 including the Network unit 602 ( 502 in FIG. 4 ) with the new design features included.
- Two antennas 610 and 608 are used for antenna diversity, instead of a single antenna 506 in FIG. 4 .
- two antennas 636 and 638 are used for antenna diversity, instead of a single antenna 512 in FIG. 4 .
- any diversity-combining scheme such as Maximal Ratio Combining, etc. can be used for the receiver chain, and transmit diversity schemes such as random phase change in one or both antennas for the transmitter chain
- a simple scheme that is based on antenna switched diversity with “continuous switching” strategy is suggested here.
- the continuous switching strategy with the switching rate selected for optimum performance (e.g.
- the RF switch 612 connected to antennas 610 and 608 and the duplex filter 614 will provide switching operations for the cellular transmit/receive operation of the Network unit 602 .
- the RF switch 634 connected to antennas 636 and 638 and the duplex filter 634 , will provide switching operations for the U-NII band transmit/receive operation of the Network unit 602 .
- the duplex filter 614 is connected to Forward-link Network unit 604 ( 514 in FIG. 4 ), and the Reverse-link Network unit 606 ( 516 in FIG. 4 ) via the directional coupler 618 .
- Directional couplers may be 17 dB directional couplers.
- the duplex filter 634 is connected to Forward-link Network unit 604 via the directional coupler 630 , and Reverse-link Network unit 606 via the directional coupler 616 . It is also possible to use hybrid combiners instead of the directional couplers 618 , 630 and 616 . It is also possible, and is more desirable, to place the Reverse-link Network receiver unit 310 internal LNA amplifier, before the directional coupler 616 (or the hybrid combiner replacement) in diagram 600 .
- a calibration signal generator/transmitter unit 622 is coupled to the reverse-link transmitter path of the Network unit 602 , via the directional coupler 618 .
- the unit 622 will provide a calibration signal, at the desired power levels, which is used to establish the level of the above-mentioned Up-link System Path Loss, PL u1 , which exists between the Network unit 602 ( 502 in FIG. 4 ) and the User unit 702 in FIG. 6 ( 504 in FIG. 4 ).
- the calibration signal generated by unit 622 is transmitted via the diversity antennas 610 and 608 at a set transmit level which is substantially below any expected signal level from cellular network (e.g. 20 dB below the minimum expected cellular signal level).
- the calibration signal generated by unit 622 is a direct-sequence spread spectrum signal modulated by a known Pseudo Random (PN) code with a known code phase (referred to hereafter as “own code” phase) and with a chipping rate comparable to the forward and reverse links of the Network unit 602 and User unit 702 (in FIG. 6 ) operating bandwidths.
- the code phases are selected such that the minimum code phase difference is larger than the maximum expected path delay (measured in multiple number of chips), and after that the code phases should be multiple integer of the minimum code phase.
- the calibration signal receiver unit 620 which is coupled to the reverse-link receive path of the Network unit 602 , by directional coupler 616 , using the known PN code and the transmit code phase is then capable of detecting and demodulating the calibration signal transmitted by unit 622 , which has entered the reverse-link path via the mentioned closed-loop mechanism that exists between the Network unit 602 and the User unit 702 in FIG. 6 ( 504 in FIG. 4 ).
- the calibration signal receiver unit 620 is capable of establishing the received signal strength, which is then used to estimate the Up-link System Path Loss, PL u1 , that exists between the Network unit 602 ( 502 in FIG. 4 ) and the User unit 702 in FIG. 6 ( 504 in FIG. 4 ).
- the calibration signal receiver unit 620 includes many sub-units, including a frequency converter similar to frequency converter unit 308 (in FIG. 3 ), to return the calibration signal, to its original operating frequency.
- the PN code phase can be assigned uniquely, or drawn according to a random algorithm, such that the probability of two units having the same code phase can be very low.
- Other code offset assignment strategies are also possible, such as dynamic assignment, where the code offset is selected, if no such offset was detected in that geographical area.
- the feature enables the calibration signal receiver 620 to be able to scan and receive “other code” phases, and hence establishing if there is any other signal coupling to or from other units, that may be operating in the same geographical area.
- the PN code used for the calibration signal can be modulated with information about the identity of the Network unit 602 .
- the carrier frequency of the transmitted calibration signal may be at the operating cellular frequency band. However, carrier frequencies in other bands, such as ISM band at 2.4 GHz, may be used for transmission of the calibration signal so that the calibration signal generator and transmitter 622 carrier frequency are placed as near as possible to the operating frequency band.
- the chipping rate and the transmit power of the calibration signal PN code is configured so that the calibration signal complies with the FCC 47 CFR Part-15 rules.
- the mentioned ISM band is not the same as the cellular operating band, nevertheless, the band is sufficiently close to enable the system to establish the antenna coupling and the Up-link and Down-link System Link Gains, (G u1 , G d1 ), at the cellular operating band (the instantaneous amplitude and phase values are no longer relevant operating at ISM band).
- Any antenna and propagation differences in average signal power between the ISM and cellular operating bands can be investigated in the design phase and taken into account in the final system design.
- the calibration signal generator and transmitter unit 622 , and the calibration signal receiver 620 are both in the Network unit 602 , operating in the desired cellular band.
- a calibration mechanism for the forward-link similar to the one described for the reverse-link, includes parts such as the unit, 622 , 618 , 616 and 620 , which can be placed in the User unit 702 .
- Up-link System Path Loss, PL u1 and the Down-link System Path Loss, PL d1 , are the same, i.e. PL d1 ⁇ PL u1 .
- the assumption enables measurement of only one of the entities to be sufficient. Validity of the assumption can be investigated for each system, and should hold true if the frequency separation between the forward and reverse links of the system is not excessively high. The assumption simplifies description. However, if the assumption is not made, a similar technique may be used in the forward-link of the Network unit 602 , or User unit 702 in FIG. 6 .
- the Equipment ID and reference frequency unit 624 basically generates a Binary Phase Shift Keying (BPSK) signal, modulated by the equipment ID number and placed at a suitable part of U-NII band, and is coupled in the transmitter path of the forward-link of the Network unit 602 via the directional coupler 630 .
- the unit is “frequency locked” to the local oscillator of the Network unit 602 .
- the carrier frequency of the signal is selected to avoid an unacceptable interference to the main cellular signal in the transmit path of the forward-link of the Network unit 602 , but is sufficiently close for an optimum transmission bandwidth.
- the 60 Hz or 50 Hz mains oscillations can be used to “lock” the local oscillators of the two units to a common frequency source.
- the 60 Hz or 50 Hz mains oscillations are converted, by suitable circuitry, to the desired frequency for the operation of the Network unit 602 and the User unit 702 .
- the Control Link unit 628 is a radio link between the two, Network unit 602 and the User unit 702 in FIG. 6 . It may be a simple proprietary link that operates in one of the unlicensed band of frequencies, or may be an in-band control signaling, multiplex with the cellular signal path. It may also be a standard wireless link such as 802.11b, 802.11a or Bluetooth, designed to operate in unlicensed frequency band.
- the control link unit 628 is connected to micro-controller unit 626 , and is able to communicate through an appropriate interface.
- the control link unit 628 is also connected to antenna 644 and 642 for transmission and reception of the control signals.
- antenna units 636 and 638 can also be used for the operation of control link unit 628 .
- the User unit 702 can be a very simple device with all signal processing and control functionalities supported in the Network unit 602 . If so, the control link can be eliminated or may implement very simple control signaling such as in-band frequency tones to set the system bandwidth and gain in the User unit 702 .
- antenna units 636 and 638 can also be used for control link unit 628 operations.
- Micro-controller unit 626 is a simple micro-processor such as ARM7 or ARM9 with all the appropriate memory and interfaces.
- the micro-controller unit 626 is controlling the operation of the Network unit 602 , and may perform some additional signal conditioning and processing such as signal level averaging and estimation, where useful.
- Some of the task of the micro-controller unit 626 is to set the operating bandwidth and gain of the forward and reverse links of the Network units 604 and 606 , communicate with and control the User unit 702 in FIG. 6 , via the control link unit 628 , control and communicate with the calibration signal generator and transmitter 622 and calibration signal receiver 620 .
- Other tasks of the micro-controller 626 are discussed later by way of an example given in FIGS. 7, 8 and 9 .
- Micro-controller unit 626 is connected to units 628 , 622 , 606 , 604 , 620 and 624 .
- Units 628 , 622 , 606 , 604 , 620 , 624 , 602 are all connected to local oscillator unit 640 , and derive their clock and reference frequencies from the local oscillator 640 signal.
- a simple user interface unit 627 which can be a keypad or simple dipswitch, is connected to micro-controller unit 626 .
- the Network unit 602 has a unique “identity code”, which can be set by the user interface unit 627 , which is known to the micro-controller unit 626 and can be communicated to the User unit 702 micro-controller unit 728 , or any other User units that may be within the operating range of Network unit 602 .
- FIG. 6 shows an embodiment of a repeater 700 including the User unit 702 ( 504 in FIG. 4 ) with the new design features included.
- Two antennas 734 and 736 are used for antenna diversity, instead of a single antenna 512 in FIG. 4 .
- two antennas 704 and 706 are used for antenna diversity, instead of a single antenna 510 in FIG. 4 .
- any diversity-combining scheme such as Maximal Ratio Combining, etc. can be used for the receiver chain, and transmit diversity schemes such as random phase change in one or both antennas for the transmitter chain
- a simple scheme that is based on antenna switched diversity with “continuous switching” strategy is suggested here.
- the continuous switching strategy with the switching rate selected for optimum performance (e.g.
- the RF switch 732 connected to antennas 734 and 736 and the duplex filter 730 will provide switching operations for the cellular transmit/receive operation of the User unit 702 .
- the RF switch 712 connected to antennas 704 and 706 and the duplex filter 714 will provide switching operations for the U-NII band transmit/receive operation of the User unit 702 .
- the duplex filter 712 is connected to Forward-link User unit 724 ( 518 in FIG.
- the duplex filter 732 is connected to Forward-link User unit 724 , and Reverse-link User unit 726 . It is also possible to use a hybrid combiner instead of the directional coupler 718 . It is also possible, and is more desirable, to place the Forward-link User unit 328 receiver 210 internal LNA, before the directional coupler 718 (or the hybrid combiner replacement), in diagram 700 .
- the Reference signal receiver unit 716 which is capable of receiving the transmitted signal generated by the equipment ID and reference frequency generator 624 in FIG. 5 , is connected to the directional coupler 718 .
- the receiver is capable of extracting the reference frequency and the ID code transmitted by the Network unit 602 equipment ID and reference frequency generator 624 .
- the extracted reference frequency is then used to provide a reference local oscillator 722 , as reference frequency signal.
- the directional coupler 718 is connected to the Forward-link User unit 724 .
- Reverse-link User unit 726 is connected to duplex filters 730 and 714 .
- the reference signal and the local oscillator unit 722 can alternatively be based on the control link unit 720 oscillator, if the unit 726 is capable of locking to the received signal carrier frequency which has been transmitted by control link unit 628 of the Network unit 602 .
- the Control Link unit 720 is a radio link between the two, Network unit 602 and the User unit 702 . It may be a proprietary link that operates in one of the unlicensed band of frequencies, or may be a standard wireless link such as 802.11b, 802.11a or Bluetooth, designed to operate in unlicensed band.
- the control link unit 720 is connected to micro-controller unit 728 , and is able to communicate through an appropriate interface.
- the control link unit 720 is also connected to antennas 708 and 710 for transmission and reception of the control signals. Note that provided that the antenna bandwidth and operating frequency allow, with minor modifications to unit 702 , antenna units 704 and 706 can also be used for the control link unit 720 operations.
- Micro-controller unit 728 is a simple microprocessor such as ARM7 or ARM9 with all the appropriate memory and interfaces.
- the micro-controller unit 728 is controlling the operation of the User unit 702 and may perform some additional signal conditioning and processing such as signal level averaging and estimation. Some of the task of the micro-controller unit 728 is to set the operating bandwidth and gain of the Forward and Reverse link User units 724 and 726 , to communicate with the Network unit 602 in FIG. 5 via the control link unit 720 . Other tasks of the micro-controller 728 are discussed later by way of an example given in FIGS. 10 and 11 .
- Micro-controller unit 728 is connected to units 720 , 726 , 724 and 722 .
- the micro-controller unit 720 is not strictly essential since the control unit 626 can perform appropriate tasks in the User unit 702 via the control link units 628 and 720 based on a simple acknowledgement scheme.
- Units 720 , 726 , 724 and 728 are all connected to local oscillator unit 722 , and derive their clock and reference frequencies from the local oscillator 722 signal.
- Techniques such as the use of vertical polarization for antennas units 610 and 608 , and horizontal polarization for antennas 734 and 736 can further improve the system performance. It is also possible to improve system performance by the use of directional antennas, as in conventional booster and repeater systems.
- a simple user interface unit 721 which can be a keypad or simple dipswitch, is connected to micro-controller unit 728 .
- the User unit 702 has a unique “identity code”, which can be set by user interface unit 721 , which is known to the micro-controller unit 728 and can be communicated to the Network unit 602 micro-controller unit 626 , or any other Network units that may be within the operating range of User unit 702 .
- the unique Network unit 602 identity code and optionally device location can be transmitted to the cellular network.
- the information can be used to locate a user in an indoor environment, for example by generating a heavily coded (protected), low bit rate data, containing a long known preamble, the unique identity code and optionally the longitude and the latitude of the Network unit 602 .
- the information can then be pulse-shaped for low spectral leakage and superimposed on the reverse-link signal of a given channel by an appropriate modulation scheme, within the Network unit 602 .
- the choice of the modulation scheme depends on the operating cellular system. For example, for GSM, which enjoys a constant envelope modulation such as GMSK, amplitude modulation (with low modulation index) can be used. For CDMA systems, with fast reverse-link power control, DBPSK can be used as the modulation scheme.
- the extraction of the above mentioned information from the received channel signal at base station may involve base station receiver modifications, but does not effect the normal operation of the cellular link.
- FIGS. 7, 8 , 9 , 10 and 11 An example of the above system operation is shown in FIGS. 7, 8 , 9 , 10 and 11 .
- FIGS. 7, 8 and 9 are the system operation flow diagrams for the Network unit 602 and
- FIGS. 10 and 11 are the flow diagrams for the User unit 702 .
- the first control-flow is to establish normal operation of the booster, with the second one to monitor the correct operation of the control link between the Network unit 602 and the User unit 702 .
- the VG amplifier 306 gain On “power-up” or “reset” of the Network unit 602 , the VG amplifier 306 gain is always set to minimum and is switched “OFF”.
- the system is said to be “operational” when VG amplifier 306 is switched “ON”, after the correct gain setting by instruction from micro-controller 626 .
- the micro-controller unit 626 On “power-up” or “reset” of the Network unit 602 (assuming that the “identity code” of the interested User unit 702 is known by or pre-entered into the Network unit 602 via the user interface unit 627 ), the micro-controller unit 626 will start the control-flow (step 802 ) in FIG. 7 .
- the micro-controller unit 626 instructs the control link unit 628 to establish link with the User Unit 702 (step 804 ).
- the control link unit 628 using the appropriate protocols, will continue trying to establish a communication link with the control unit 720 of the User unit 702 until such link is established (step 806 ).
- the micro-controller unit 626 will select the desired U-NII band of operation (step 808 ) and instruct the calibration signal receiver unit 620 to attempt to receive all the possible code offsets (step 8 ) in the frequency band, ensuring no signal paths from other User units are operational in the geographical area directed to the Network unit 602 , and facilitating selection of an unused code offset and transmission channel.
- step 812 If an unintended signal path exists between the Network unit 602 and other operating User units (step 812 ), depending on the severity of the coupling path and the strength of the “other units” received calibration signal(s) strength, several different actions can be taken, after a comparison of the received signal SNR with threshold SNR (SNR th ) (step 814 );
- the control flow would be at point “A” in FIG. 7 .
- Point “A”, shown in FIG. 8 is the continuation of point “A” in FIG. 7 .
- the Network unit 602 will select an unused code offset ( 824 ), and start the transmission of the calibration signal with the known code offset, at the lowest possible transmit power (step 826 ).
- the task is performed by an instruction from the micro-controller 626 to the calibration signal generator and transmitter unit 622 .
- the micro-controller 626 will also instruct the calibration signal receiver unit 620 to try to receive the calibration signal for the above mentioned code offset, used by the transmitter unit 622 (block 828 ).
- the Network unit 602 instructs the User unit 702 , via the control link 628 , to commence operation, with the minimum possible transmitter powers for Reverse-link and Forward-link User units 726 and 724 respectively (step 830 ). If no signal is detected with a desired strength by receiver 620 (step 832 ), and the maximum transmit power of the transmitter unit 622 has not been reached (step 834 ), the micro-controller unit 626 will instruct the transmitter unit 622 to increase the power of the transmitted signal by a predetermined step size, dG, (step 836 ).
- the Network unit 602 is capable of calculating the Up-link System Path Loss, PL u1 , and hence the Up-link System Link Gain, G u1 , and accordingly, supplies appropriate transmitter power of the Reverse-link Network unit 606 (step 838 ). Assuming the Up-link System Path Loss, PL u1 , and the Down-link System Path Loss, PL d1 , are the same, i.e.
- the maximum gain of the transmitter amplifier 212 of the Forward-link User unit 724 can be calculated (step 838 ) and forwarded to User unit 702 , via the control link unit 628 (step 840 ).
- the micro-controller 626 via link control unit 628 , informs the User unit 702 of the correct amplifier 212 gain setting (block 840 ).
- the micro-controller 626 sets the amplifier 306 at the correct gain for transmission (step 842 ) and instructs the User unit 702 to commence operation with the stated amplifier 212 gain setting (block 844 ).
- the calibration signal receiver 620 continues to receive the signal transmitted by the calibration signal transmitter 622 (step 846 ). If the safe average signal power level is exceeded for a substantial amount of time (step 848 ), the micro-controller 626 will instruct the User unit 702 , via the control link unit 628 , to stop operation (step 850 ), and also Network 602 will stop transmission of signals by the Reverse-link Network unit 606 (step 852 ), and the system steps 802 to 844 are repeated. If the average signal power level is within the expected range, the calibration signal receiver 620 is instructed to receive and detect signals with all other possible code offsets (step 856 ). If no signal with substantial average signal power level is detected, the Network unit 602 will return to step 846 .
- the Network unit 602 will go to step 850 .
- the second control-flow operation starts after step 806 , and is shown in FIG. 9 .
- the second operation checks the quality and performance of the control links of the control units 628 and 720 operation, by monitoring such quantities as BER, SNR, background noise and interference (step 860 ). If the operation of the link is not satisfactory (step 862 ), an error signal is flagged (step 864 ), all transmissions in the forward and reverse cellular link, of the Network unit 602 are stopped (step 866 ), and the User unit 702 is instructed to stop operation (step 868 ), and finally the Network unit 602 will go back to step 802 (step 870 ).
- FIGS. 10 and 11 are the system operation flow diagram for the User unit 702 .
- the first control-flow is to establish normal operation of the booster ( FIG. 10 ), with the second one to monitor the correct operation of the control link between the Network unit 602 and the User unit 702 ( FIG. 11 ).
- the VG amplifier 212 gain is always set to minimum and is switched “OFF”.
- the system is said to be “operational” when VG amplifier 212 is switched “ON”, after the correct gain setting by instruction from micro-controller 728 .
- the micro-controller 728 On “power-up” or “reset” of the User unit 702 (assuming that the “identity code” of the interested Network unit 602 is known by or pre-entered into the User unit 702 via the user interface unit 721 ), the micro-controller 728 will start the control-flow (step 902 in FIG. 10 ). The micro-controller unit 728 instructs the control link unit 720 to establish link with the Network Unit 602 (step 904 ). The control link unit 728 , using the appropriate protocols, will continue trying to establish a communication link with the control unit 620 of the Network unit 602 until such link is established (step 906 ).
- the User unit 702 monitors the control channel for instruction from the Network unit 602 (step 908 ). If a “stop” instruction is issued by the Network unit 602 (step 11 ), the User unit 702 will stop the forward-link and reverse-link transmissions (step 912 ). If the instruction is to set parameters (step 916 ) such as the “operation bandwidth”, or the “U-NII spectrum channel number”, or “the cellular channel number”, or any or all of the above, and any other system parameters to be set, the User unit 702 sets the parameters as specified by the instruction (step 918 ).
- parameters such as the “operation bandwidth”, or the “U-NII spectrum channel number”, or “the cellular channel number”, or any or all of the above, and any other system parameters to be set
- the User unit 702 sets the requested gain for the VG amplifier 212 (step 922 ). If the instruction is to “commence transmission” (step 923 ), the User unit 702 begins operation in the forward 724 and the reverse 726 links of the unit (step 924 ). Other instructions that are not mentioned in the example may be used. The instructions are executed by the User unit 702 if the instructions are received by the User unit 702 (step 925 & 926 ). After instruction execution, the User unit 702 returns to step 908 .
- the second control-flow operation starts after step 906 , and is shown in FIG. 11 .
- the second operation checks the quality and performance of the control links of the control units 628 and 720 operation, by monitoring such quantities as BER, SNR and the background noise and interference (step 930 ). If the operation of the link is not satisfactory (step 932 ), an error signal is flagged (step 934 ), all transmissions in the forward 724 and reverse 726 link units, are stopped by the User unit 702 (step 936 ), and finally the User unit 702 will go back to step 902 (step 938 ).
- FIG. 12 shows an example of digital implementation of the Network unit 602 (labeled 1002 in FIG. 12 ), which is placed where good signal coverage exists, indoor or outdoors.
- Two antennas 1004 and 1006 are used for antenna diversity for the cellular band transmitter and receiver of the Network unit 1002 .
- two antennas 1036 and 1038 are used for antenna diversity of the U-NII band operation of the Network unit 1002 .
- any diversity-combining scheme such as Maximal Ratio Combining, etc. can be used for the receiver chain, and transmit diversity schemes such as random phase change in one or both antennas for the transmitter chain
- a simple scheme that is based on antenna switched diversity with “continuous switching” strategy is suggested here.
- the continuous switching strategy with the switching rate selected for optimum performance (e.g.
- the RF switch 1032 connected to antennas 1036 and 1038 and the duplex filter 1034 will provide switching operations for the U-NII band transmit/receive operation of the Network unit 1002 .
- the duplex filter 1010 is connected to forward-link LNA 1012 and the directional coupler 1056 .
- LNA 1012 is connected to the frequency converter unit 1014 .
- Frequency converter 1014 is connected to Automatic Gain Control (AGC) unit 1018 .
- AGC Automatic Gain Control
- the frequency converter 1014 converts the frequency band of the incoming signal from the cellular band to baseband, or “near baseband” frequency band.
- the frequency converter unit 1014 may supply appropriate filtering for the correct operation of the receiver chain.
- the operating frequency of the frequency converter unit 1014 is set by micro-controller unit 1060 .
- the AGC unit 1018 is connected to Analogue to Digital Converter (AD/C) unit 1020 and the Signal Conditioning (SC) unit 1022 .
- the AGC 1018 is optional, and its task is to place the received signal level substantially close to the middle of the dynamic range of the AD/C 1020 . If included, the design and operation of the unit 1018 is configured so that in the presence of low signal power noise within the operating bandwidth does not dominate the operation of the AGC unit 1018 . Also care is taken so that the gain contribution of the AGC unit 1018 is compensated in the final Down-link System Link Gain G d1 calculations or the gain value of the AGC 1018 is compensated in the SC unit 1022 .
- the AD/C unit 1020 has to provide the appropriate dynamic range, which can be as high as 144 dB (24-bits).
- the AD/C unit 1020 is connected to the Signal Conditioning unit 1022 .
- the Signal Conditioning unit 1022 performs such tasks as channel select filtering for the desired operating frequency band, frequency conversion, insertion of reference frequency, signal level estimation, AGC algorithm, WLAN transmitter algorithms, and any other features that use signal conditioning and processing.
- the channel select filters that can be implemented as poly-phased filters can be set for a given operating bandwidth of 1.3, 5, 10 or 15 MHz, operating at any position within the forward-link cellular or PCS or desired frequency spectrum.
- the Signal Conditioning unit 1022 clock frequency is derived from a local reference frequency 1070 and provided by clock unit 1024 .
- the Signal Conditioning unit 1022 may be implemented by a variety of technologies such as FPGAs, ASICs and general purpose DSPs such as Texas Instruments TMS320C6416-7E3 processor.
- the Signal Conditioning unit 1022 may include all appropriate interfaces and memory.
- the Signal Conditioning unit 1022 is connected to Digital to Analogue Converter (DA/C) unit 1026 .
- the DA/C unit 1026 may include appropriate post filtering after digital to analogue conversion.
- the DA/C unit 1026 is connected to frequency converter unit 1028 .
- Frequency converter unit 1028 up-converts the frequencies of the input signal to the desired portion of U-NII band of frequencies.
- the frequency converter unit 1028 may supply all filtering for the correct operation of the transmitter chain.
- the operating frequency of the frequency converter unit 1028 is set by micro-controller unit 1060 . Therefore, Dynamic Channel Allocation (DCA) algorithm can be used to select the best operating frequency band.
- the frequency converter unit 1028 is connected to the variable gain amplifier unit 1030 .
- the gain of the amplifier 1030 is set by the micro-controller unit 1060 , and in most time is set to maximum allowed power for transmission in U-NII band.
- the variable gain amplifier unit 1030 is connected to Duplex filter 1034 .
- the duplex filter 1034 is connected reverse-link LNA 1040 an the VG amplifier 1030 .
- LNA 1040 is connected to the frequency converter unit 1042 .
- Frequency converter unit 1042 is connected to the directional coupler unit 1041 .
- the frequency converter 1042 converts the frequency band of the incoming signal from the U-NII band to baseband, or “near baseband” frequency band.
- the frequency converter unit 1042 includes filtering for the correct operation of the receiver chain.
- the operating frequency of the frequency converter unit 1042 is set by micro-controller unit 1060 .
- Directional coupler unit 1041 is connected to Automatic Gain Control (AGC) unit 1044 , and the calibration signal receiver unit 1016 .
- AGC Automatic Gain Control
- the AGC unit 1044 is connected to Analogue to Digital Converter (AD/C) unit 1046 and the Signal Conditioning unit 1048 .
- the AGC 1044 is optional, and its task is to place the received signal level substantially close to the middle of the dynamic range of the AD/C 1046 . If included, the design and operation of the unit 1044 are configured so that in the presence of low signal power noise within the operating bandwidth does not dominate the operation of the AGC unit 1044 . Also care can be taken so that the gain contribution of the AGC unit 1044 is compensated in the final Up-link System Link Gain G u1 calculations or the gain value of the AGC 1044 is compensated in the SC unit 1048 .
- the AD/C unit 1046 supplies suitable dynamic range, which can be as high as 144 dB (24-bits).
- the AD/C unit 1046 is connected to the Signal Conditioning unit 1048 .
- the Signal Conditioning unit 1048 performs such tasks as channel select filtering for the desired operating frequency band, frequency conversion, signal calibration receiver, signal level estimation, AGC algorithm, WLAN receiver algorithms and any other features that use signal conditioning and processing.
- the channel select filters that can be implemented as poly-phased filters can be set for a given operating bandwidth of 1.3, 5, 10 or 15 MHz, operating at any position within the forward-link U-NII or any desired frequency spectrum.
- the Signal Conditioning unit 1048 clock frequency is derived from a local reference frequency 1070 and provided by clock unit 1024 .
- the Signal Conditioning unit 1048 may be implemented by a variety of technologies such as FPGAs, ASICs and general purpose DSPs such as Texas Instruments TMS320C6416-7E3 processor.
- the Signal Conditioning unit 1048 may include all appropriate interfaces and memory.
- the Signal Conditioning unit 1048 is connected to Digital to Analogue Converter (DA/C) unit 1050 .
- the DA/C unit 1050 is connected to frequency converter unit 1052 .
- the DA/C unit 1050 supplies post filtering subsequent to digital to analogue conversion.
- Frequency converter unit 1052 up-converts the frequencies of the input signal to the desired portion of cellular or PCS band of frequencies.
- the frequency converter unit 1052 includes filtering for the correct operation of the transmitter chain.
- the operating frequency of the frequency converter unit 1052 is set by micro-controller unit 1060 .
- the frequency converter unit 1052 is connected to the variable gain amplifier unit 1054 .
- the gain of the amplifier 1054 is set by the micro-controller unit 1060 .
- the variable gain amplifier unit 1054 is connected to directional coupler 1056 .
- the directional coupler 1056 is connected to Duplex filter 1010 . It is also possible to use hybrid combiners instead of the directional couplers 1041 and 1056 .
- a calibration signal generator/transmitter 1058 is coupled to the reverse-link transmitter path via the directional coupler 1056 .
- the unit 1058 will provide a calibration signal, at desired power levels, which is used to establish the level of the above mentioned Up-link System Path Loss, PL u1 , that exists between the Network unit 1002 ( 502 in FIG. 4 ) and the User unit 2002 in FIG. 13 ( 504 in FIG. 4 ).
- the calibration signal generated by unit 1058 is transmitted via the diversity antennas 1004 and 1006 at a set transmit level which is substantially below any expected signal level from cellular network (e.g. 20 dB below the minimum expected cellular signal level).
- the calibration signal generated by unit 1058 is a direct-sequence spread spectrum signal modulated by a known Pseudo Random (PN) code with a known code phase (“own code” phase) and with a chipping rate comparable to the forward and reverse links of the Network unit 1002 and User unit 2002 operating bandwidths.
- PN Pseudo Random
- the code phases are selected such that the minimum code phase difference is larger than the maximum expected path delay (measured in multiple number of chips) and after that, the other code phases should be multiple integer of the minimum code phase.
- the calibration signal receiver 1016 which is connected to the reverse-link of the Network unit 1002 , by using the known PN code and the transmit code phase (“own code” phase), is then capable of detecting and demodulating the calibration signal transmitted by unit 1058 , which has entered the reverse-link path via the mentioned closed-loop mechanism that exists between the Network unit 1002 and the User unit 2002 in FIG. 13 ( 504 in FIG. 4 ).
- the calibration signal receiver unit 1016 is capable of establishing the received signal strength, which is then used to estimate the Up-link System Path Loss, PL u1 , that exists between the Network unit 1002 ( 502 in FIG. 4 ) and the User unit 2002 in FIG. 13 ( 504 in FIG. 4 ).
- the PN code phase can be assigned uniquely, or drawn according to a random algorithm, such that the probability of two units having the same code phase can be very low.
- the feature enables the calibration signal receiver 1016 to be able to scan and receive “other code” phases, and hence, establishing if there is any other signal coupling to or from other units that may be operating in the same geographical area.
- the code can also be modulated with information about the identity of the Network unit 1002 .
- the carrier frequency of the transmitted calibration signal may be at the operating cellular frequency band. However, carrier frequencies in other bands, such as ISM band at 2.4 GHz, may be used for the transmission of the calibration signal so that the calibration signal generator and transmitter 1058 carrier frequency is placed as near as possible to the operating frequency band.
- the chipping rate and the transmit power of the calibration signal PN code are such that the calibration signal complies with the FCC 47 CFR Part-15 rules.
- the ISM band is not the same as the cellular operating band, nevertheless, the band is sufficiently close to enable the system to establish the antenna coupling and the Up-link and Down-link System Link Gains, (G u1 , G d1 ), at the cellular operating band.
- the instantaneous amplitude and phase values are no longer relevant operating at ISM band. Any antenna and propagation differences in the average signals level between the two ISM and cellular operating bands can be investigated in the design phase and taken into account in the final system design.
- the calibration transmitter unit 1058 and the calibration receiver unit 1026 baseband functions can be integrated and supported by the Signal Conditioning unit 1048 .
- the calibration transmitter unit 1058 and the calibration receiver unit 1016 functions can also be integrated into reverse-link signal path.
- the calibration signal generator and transmitter unit 1058 and the calibration signal receiver 1016 are both in the Network unit 1002 .
- both or one of the units including calibration signal generator and transmitter unit 1058 , and calibration signal receiver 1016 can also be placed in the User unit 2002 with certain modifications and considerations.
- a calibration mechanism for the forward-link similar to the one described for the reverse-link, includes components such as the units, 1056 , 1058 , 1016 and 1041 , which is placed in the User unit 2002 .
- the Equipment ID and reference frequency unit 624 shown in FIG. 5 in the forward-link path, is now supported by the Signal Conditioning unit 1022 in the digital Network unit 1002 , with the description and function remaining the same as the one discussed for unit 624 .
- the control link unit 1062 is a radio link between the two Network 1002 and the User 2002 (in FIG. 13 ) units. It may be a proprietary link that operates in one of the unlicensed band of frequencies, or may be a standard wireless link such as 802.11b, 802.11a, 802.11g or Bluetooth, designed to operate in the unlicensed band.
- the control link unit 1062 is connected to micro-controller unit 1060 and is able to communicate through an appropriate interface.
- the control link unit 1062 is also connected to antennas 1066 and 1064 for transmission and reception of the control signals. Note that provided that the antenna bandwidth and operating frequency allow, with minor modifications to unit 1002 , antenna units 1036 and 1038 can also be used for the control link unit 1062 operations.
- the baseband functionality of the control link unit 1062 can be included in the Signal Conditioning units 1022 and 1048 , with the transmit/receive control link unit 1062 signals multiplexed (in frequency or time) with the transmit/receive signals of the forward and the reverse-link Network unit 1002 , that are transmitted and received by antennas 1038 and 1036 .
- Micro-controller unit 1060 is a simple micro-processor such as ARM7 or ARM9 with all the appropriate memory and interfaces.
- the micro-controller unit 1060 is controlling the operation of the Network unit 1002 and may perform some additional signal conditioning and processing such as signal level averaging and estimation.
- Some of the task of the micro-controller unit 1060 is to set the operating bandwidth and gain of the forward and reverse link Network unit 1002 components, communicate with the User unit 2002 in FIG. 13 via the control link unit 1062 , control and communicate with the calibration signal generator and transmitter 1058 and calibration signal receiver 1016 .
- Other tasks of the micro-controller 1060 are discussed by way of an example given in FIGS. 7, 8 and 9 .
- Micro-controller unit 1060 is connected to units 1062 , 1016 , 1058 , 1052 , 1048 , 1042 , 1030 , 1028 , 1022 and 1014 .
- Units 1062 , 1016 , 1058 , 1052 , 1042 , 1060 , 1028 , 1046 , 1020 , 1024 and 1014 are all connected to local oscillator unit 1070 , or derive their clock and reference frequencies from the local oscillator 1070 signal.
- a simple user interface unit 1061 which can be a keypad or simple dipswitch, is connected to micro-controller unit 1060 .
- FIG. 13 shows an example of digital implementation of the User unit 702 (labeled 2002 in FIG. 13 ), which is placed where good signal coverage does not exist, indoor or outdoors.
- Two antennas 2034 and 2036 are used for antenna diversity for the cellular band transmitter and receiver operation of the User unit 2002 .
- two antennas 2004 and 2006 are used for antenna diversity of the U-NII band operation of the User unit 2002 .
- any diversity-combining scheme such as Maximal Ratio Combining, etc. can be used for the receiver chain, and transmit diversity schemes such as random phase change in one or both antennas for the transmitter chain
- a simple scheme that is based on antenna switched diversity with “continuous switching” strategy is suggested here.
- the continuous switching strategy with the switching rate selected for optimum performance (e.g.
- the continuous-switch diversity scheme is simply implemented as a simple RF switch at the antenna ports. Therefore, the RF switch 2032 connected to antennas 2034 and 2036 and the duplex filter 2030 and the micro-controller 2054 , under the control of the micro-controller 2054 , will provide switching operations for the cellular transmit/receive operation of the User unit 2002 . Also the RF switch 2008 connected to antennas 2004 and 2006 and the duplex filter 2010 will provide switching operations for the U-NII band transmit/receive operation of the User unit 2002 .
- the duplex filter 2010 is connected to forward-link LNA 2012 and VG amplifier 2052 .
- LNA 2012 is connected to the frequency converter unit 2014 .
- Frequency converter 2014 is connected to Automatic Gain Control (AGC) unit 2016 .
- the frequency converter 2014 converts the frequency band of the incoming signal from the cellular band to baseband, or “near baseband” frequency band.
- the frequency converter unit 2014 includes all appropriate filtering for the correct operation of the receiver chain.
- the operating frequency of the frequency converter unit 2014 is set by micro-controller unit 2054 .
- the AGC unit 2016 is connected to Analogue to Digital Converter (AD/C) unit 2018 and the Signal Conditioning unit 2020 .
- the AGC 2016 is optional, and its task is to place the received signal level substantially close to the middle of the dynamic range of the AD/C 2018 .
- design and operation of the unit 2016 are arranged so that in the presence of low signal power noise within the operating bandwidth does not dominate the operation of the AGC unit 2016 . Also care may be taken so that the gain contribution of the AGC unit 2016 is compensated in the final Down-link System Link Gain G d1 calculations, or the gain value of the AGC 2016 is compensated in the SC unit 2020 . If the AGC unit 2016 is not included, the AD/C unit 2018 supplies a suitable dynamic range, which can be as high as 144 dB (24-bits). The AD/C unit 2018 is connected to the Signal Conditioning unit 2020 .
- the Signal Conditioning unit 2020 is programmed to perform such tasks as channel select filtering for the desired operating frequency band, frequency conversion, extraction of reference frequency, signal level estimation, AGC algorithm, WLAN receiver algorithms and any other features that usesignal conditioning and processing.
- the channel select filters that can be implemented as poly-phased filters can be set for a given operating bandwidth of 1.3, 5, 10 or 15 MHz, operating at any position within the forward-link cellular or PCS or desired frequency spectrum, and set similar to the same parameters as the Network unit 1002 .
- the Signal Conditioning unit 2020 extracts the reference frequency transmitted by the Network unit 1002 .
- the DA/C 2021 which is connected to the Signal Conditioning unit 2020 provides the analogue form of the reference frequency 2023 .
- the Network unit 1002 and the User unit 2002 use the mains electricity supply for their operations, it is possible to use the 60 Hz (or 50 Hz) mains oscillations, to “lock” the local oscillators of these two units, to a common frequency source.
- the 60 Hz or 50 Hz mains oscillations are converted, by suitable circuitry, to the desired frequency, for the operation of the Network unit 1002 and the User unit 2002 .
- the Signal Conditioning unit 2020 clock frequency is derived from a local reference frequency 2023 and provided by clock unit 2022 .
- the Signal Conditioning unit 2020 may be implemented by a variety of technologies such as FPGAs, ASICs and general purpose DSPs such as Texas Instruments TMS320C6416-7E3 processor.
- the Signal Conditioning unit 2020 includes suitable interfaces and memory.
- the Signal Conditioning unit 2020 is connected to Digital to Analogue Converter (DA/C) unit 2024 .
- the DA/C unit 2024 is connected to frequency converter unit 2026 .
- the DA/C unit 2024 includes post filtering that is appropriate after the digital to analogue conversion.
- Frequency converter unit 2026 up-converts the frequencies of the input signal to the desired portion of cellular (or PCS) band of frequencies.
- the frequency converter unit 2026 includes filtering for correct operation of the transmitter chain.
- the operating frequency of the frequency converter unit 2026 is set by micro-controller unit 2054 .
- the frequency converter unit 2026 is connected to the variable gain amplifier unit 2028 .
- the gain of the amplifier 2028 is set by the micro-controller unit 2054 .
- the variable gain amplifier unit 2028 is connected to Duplex filter 2030 .
- the Duplex filter 2030 is also connected to the reverse-link LNA 2038 .
- LNA 2038 is connected to the frequency converter unit 2040 .
- Frequency converter 2040 is connected to Automatic Gain Control (AGC) unit 2042 .
- the frequency converter 2040 converts the frequency band of the incoming signal from the cellular (or PCS) band to baseband, or “near baseband” frequency band.
- the frequency converter unit 2040 includes filtering for correct operation of the receiver chain.
- the operating frequency of the frequency converter unit 2040 is set by micro-controller unit 2054 .
- the AGC unit 2042 is connected to Analogue to Digital Converter (AD/C) unit 2044 and the Signal Conditioning unit 2046 .
- AD/C Analogue to Digital Converter
- the AGC 2042 is optional, and its task is to place the received signal level substantially close to the middle of the dynamic range of the AD/C 2044 . If included, design and operation of the unit 2042 are configured so that in the presence of low signal power noise within the operating bandwidth does not dominate the operation of the AGC unit 2042 . Also care may be taken so that the gain contribution of the AGC unit 2042 is compensated in the final Up-link System Link Gain, G u1 calculations, or the gain value of the AGC 2042 is compensated in the SC unit 2046 . If the AGC unit 2042 is not included, the AD/C unit 2044 supplies an appropriate dynamic range, which can be as high as 144 dB (24-bits).
- the AD/C unit 2044 is connected to the Signal Conditioning unit 2046 .
- the Signal Conditioning unit 2046 performs such tasks as channel select filtering for the desired operating frequency band, frequency conversion, signal level estimation, AGC algorithm, WLAN transmitter algorithms and any other features that usesignal conditioning and processing.
- the channel select filters that can be implemented as poly-phased filters can be set for a given operating bandwidth of 1.3, 5, 10 or 15 MHz, operating at any position within the forward-link U-NII or any desired frequency spectrum and set similar to the same parameters as the Network unit 1002 .
- the Signal Conditioning unit 2046 clock frequency is derived from a local reference frequency 2023 and provided by clock unit 2022 .
- the Signal Conditioning unit 2046 may be implemented by a variety of technologies such as FPGAs, ASICs and general purpose DSPs such as Texas Instruments TMS320C6416-7E3 processor.
- the Signal Conditioning unit 2046 includes appropriate interfaces and memory.
- the Signal Conditioning unit 2046 is connected to Digital to Analogue Converter (DA/C) unit 2048 .
- the DA/C unit 2048 is connected to frequency converter unit 2050 .
- the DA/C unit 2048 includes post filtering that is appropriate the digital to analogue conversion.
- Frequency converter unit 2050 up converts the frequencies of the input signal to the desired portion of U-NII band of frequencies.
- the frequency converter unit 2050 includes appropriate filtering for the correct operation of the transmitter chain.
- the operating frequency of the frequency converter unit 2050 is set by micro-controller unit 2054 , and therefore Dynamic Channel Allocation (DCA) algorithm can be used to select the best operating frequency band.
- the frequency converter unit 2050 is connected to the variable gain amplifier unit 2052 .
- the gain of the amplifier 2052 is set by the micro-controller unit 2054 and in most time is set to maximum allowed power for transmission in U-NII band.
- the variable gain amplifier unit 2052 is connected to Duplex filter 2010 .
- the Control Link unit 2056 is a radio link between the Network unit 1002 and the User unit 2002 . It may be a proprietary link that operates in one of the unlicensed band of frequencies, or may be a standard wireless link such as 802.11b, 802.11a or Bluetooth, designed to operate in unlicensed band.
- the control link unit 2056 is connected to micro-controller unit 2054 and is able to communicate through an appropriate interface.
- the control link unit 2056 is also connected to antenna 2058 and 2060 for transmission and reception of the control signals. Note that provided that the antenna bandwidth and operating frequency allow, with minor modifications to unit 2002 , antenna units 2004 and 2006 can also be used for the control link unit 2056 operations.
- the baseband functionality of the control link unit 2056 can be included in the Signal Conditioning units 2046 and 2020 respectively, with the transmit/receive control link unit 2056 signals multiplexed (in frequency or time) with the transmit/receive signals of the forward and reverse User unit 2002 , that are transmitted and received by antennas 2004 and 2006 .
- Micro-controller unit 2054 is a simple micro-processor such as ARM7 or ARM9 with all the appropriate memory and interfaces.
- the micro-controller unit 2054 is controlling the operation of the Network unit 2002 and may perform some additional signal conditioning and processing such as signal level averaging and estimation. Some of the task of the micro-controller unit 2054 is to set the operating bandwidth and gain of the forward and reverse link network components, and to communicate with the Network unit 1002 in FIG. 12 via the control link unit 2056 . Other tasks of the micro-controller 2054 are discussed by way of an example given in FIGS. 10 and 11 .
- Micro-controller unit 2054 is connected to units 2056 , 2052 , 2050 , 2046 , 2040 , 2028 , 2026 , 2020 and 2014 .
- a simple user interface unit 2055 which can be a keypad or simple dipswitch, is connected to micro-controller unit 2054 .
- Units 2056 , 2052 , 2050 , 2040 , 2028 , 2026 , 2054 , 2018 , 2044 , 2022 and 2014 are all connected to local oscillator unit 2023 , or derive their clock and reference frequencies from the local oscillator 2023 signal.
- the signals received through antenna units 2034 and 2036 are re-transmitted through the antenna units 1004 and 1006 , at a higher signal power. These re-transmitted signals can be received again through the antenna units 2034 and 2036 (and have been termed above as the “Up-link Returned-Signal”), causing a signal return path in the system that may cause instability in the operation of the booster.
- Up-link Returned-Signal the returned signal
- a delay of about 1 usec will ensure the time separation of the re-transmitted signal, from the original received signal, and hence the ability to mitigate the re-transmitted signal by the example “Channel Filtering” technique, which is discussed later.
- the delay can be introduced in the Signal Conditioning unit 1048 , provided that there is a digital data buffer of sufficient size available.
- the Channel Filtering operation can also be performed by the Signal Conditioning unit 1048 (or SC unit 2046 ), or can be performed by a separate ASIC or FPGA, connected to the AD/C unit 1046 , and the Signal Conditioning unit 1024 .
- the ASIC or the FPGA units can be placed in the User unit 2002 , connected to the AD/C unit 2042 and Signal Conditioning unit 2046 .
- the calibration signal can be used for channel estimation purposes, so that the amplitude and the phase of the overall channel response (including the return path) can be estimated, for the setting of the Channel Filter taps.
- the introduction of Channel Filter in the signal path also has an impact on the operation of the antenna diversity scheme.
- Channel estimation is performed so that antenna switching operations are synchronized so that, out of possible four channels, only two possible propagation channels exist. Since the antenna switching (selection) is under the control of micro-controller unit 1060 in the Network unit 1002 , and micro-controller 2054 in the User unit 2002 , channel estimation can be performed for both propagation paths, and two sets of Channel Filter coefficients can be determined for filtering operation.
- the Channel Filtering mechanism is not used to totally mitigate the returned signal but is rather used to suppress the signal sufficiently so that some system gain is possible for the signal boosting operation.
- the introduction of the “deliberate delay” may also be used in conjunction with any other known signal-processing algorithm.
- control-flow description given for FIGS. 7, 8 , 9 , 10 and 11 can also be used for the digital implementation of the Network unit 1002 and User unit 2002 , which is discussed above in FIGS. 12 and 13 .
- FIG. 14 depicts an analogue implementation example of such an arrangement, where the booster is placed where good signal coverage exists, indoor or outdoors.
- the back-to-back unit 2252 consists of antennas 2254 , 2256 , 2282 and 2280 , all operating in the cellular spectrum of interest.
- Antennas 2254 and 2256 are connected to the RF switch 2258 , where antenna switched diversity operation for transmit and receive operation is provided as discussed for Network unit 602 and User unit 702 .
- the RF switch unit 2258 is connected to the duplex filter unit 2260 .
- the duplex filter unit 2260 is connected to the LNA 2288 in the Forward-link unit 2264 .
- the LNA 2288 is connected to the filter unit 2286 .
- the bandpass filter unit 2286 can be designed to pass all or a desired part of the interested cellular spectrum, or can be a bank of overlapping bandpass filters, covering the full spectrum of the interested cellular system, with a RF switch, such that the desired band and bandwidth, can be selected.
- Filter unit 2286 is connected to the variable gain amplifier 2284 .
- the gain of the VG amplifier unit 2284 is set by micro-controller unit 2270 .
- the variable gain amplifier unit 2284 is connected to the duplex filter 2276 .
- the duplex filter 2276 is connected to RF switch 2278 .
- the antennas 2282 and 2280 are both connected to the RF switch 2278 .
- the RF switch unit 2278 is connected to the duplex filter 2276 .
- the duplex filter unit 2276 is connected to directional coupler unit 2274 .
- the directional coupler unit 2274 is connected to calibration signal receiver 2272 and LNA 2290 in the Reverse-link unit 2266 .
- the calibration signal receiver unit 2272 which is coupled to the reverse-link receive path of the booster unit 2252 , by directional coupler 2272 , using the known PN code and the transmit code phase is then capable of detecting and demodulating the calibration signal transmitted by unit 2268 , which has entered the reverse-link path via the mentioned closed-loop mechanism that exists between the antenna units 2254 , 2256 and the antenna units 2280 , 2282 .
- the calibration signal receiver unit 2272 is capable of establishing the received signal strength, which is then used to estimate the Up-link System Path Loss, PL i1 .
- the LNA 2290 is connected to filter unit 2292 , which is connected to variable gain amplifier unit 2294 .
- the bandpass filter 2292 can be designed to pass all or a desired part of the interested cellular spectrum, or can be a bank of overlapping bandpass filters, covering the full spectrum of the interested cellular system, with a RF switch, such that the desired band and bandwidth can be selected.
- the gain of the VG amplifier unit 2294 is set by micro-controller unit 2270 .
- the variable amplifier 2294 is connected to directional coupler unit 2262 .
- Directional coupler unit 2262 is connected to the calibration signal generator and transmitter unit 2268 , and duplex filter 2260 .
- the micro-controller 2270 is connected to calibration signal generator and transmitter unit 2268 , the calibration signal receiver 2272 , the Reverse-link unit 2266 and Forward-link unit 2264 .
- a simple user interface unit 2271 which can be a keypad or simple dipswitch, is connected to micro-controller unit 2270 .
- the unique unit 2252 identity code and optionally device location can be transmitted to the cellular network.
- the information can be used to locate a user in an indoor environment, for example by generating a heavily-coded (protected), low bit rate data, containing a long known preamble, the unique identity code and optionally the longitude and the latitude of the unit 2252 .
- the information can then be pulse-shaped for low spectral leakage and superimposed on the reverse-link signal of a given channel by an appropriate modulation scheme, within the unit 2252 .
- Choice of the modulation scheme depends on the operating cellular system. For example, for GSM, which enjoys a constant envelope modulation such as GMSK, amplitude modulation (with low modulation index) can be used.
- amplitude modulation with low modulation index
- DBPSK can be used as the modulation scheme. Extraction of the illustrative information from the received channel signal at base station may involve base station receiver modifications, but does not effect normal operation of the cellular link.
- FIG. 15 depicts a digital implementation example of Back-to-Back arrangement, where the booster is placed where good signal coverage exists, indoor or outdoors.
- the back-to-back unit 2302 consists of antennas 2304 , 2306 , 2328 and 2330 , all operating in the cellular spectrum of interest.
- Antennas 2304 and 2306 are connected to the RF switch 2308 , where antenna switched diversity operation for transmit and receive operations is provided as discussed for Network unit 1002 and User unit 2002 .
- the RF switch unit 2308 is connected to the duplex filter unit 2310 .
- the RF switch unit 2308 is also connected to micro-controller 2350 .
- the duplex filter unit 2310 is connected to the LNA 2312 .
- the directional coupler unit 2311 is connected to output of the LNA 2312 , and the calibration receiver unit 2305 .
- the calibration receiver 2305 is also connected to micro-controller 2350 .
- the directional coupler unit 2311 is also connected to the frequency converter unit 2313 .
- Frequency converter 2313 is connected to Automatic Gain Control (AGC) unit 2314 .
- the frequency converter 2313 converts the frequency band of the incoming signal from the cellular band to baseband, or “near baseband” frequency band.
- the frequency converter unit 2313 includes filtering for the correct operation of the receiver chain.
- the operating frequency of the frequency converter unit 2313 is set by micro-controller unit 2350 .
- the AGC unit 2314 is connected to Analogue-to-Digital Converter (AD/C) unit 2316 .
- AD/C Analogue-to-Digital Converter
- the AGC 2314 is optional, and its task is to place the received signal level substantially close to the middle of the dynamic range of the AD/C 2316 . If included, design and operation of unit 2314 are configured so that in the presence of low signal power, noise within the operating bandwidth does not dominate the operation of the AGC unit 2314 . Also care is taken so that the gain contribution of the AGC unit 2314 is compensated in the final Down-link System Link Gain, G d1 calculations, or alternatively the gain value of the AGC 2314 is compensated in the SC unit 2318 . If the AGC unit 2314 is not included, the AD/C unit 2316 supports a suitable dynamic range, which can be as high as 144 dB (24-bits).
- the AD/C unit 2316 is connected to Signal Conditioning unit 2318 .
- the Signal Conditioning unit 2318 performs such tasks as channel select filtering for the desired operating frequency band, frequency conversion, signal level estimation, AGC algorithm, and any other features that usesignal conditioning and processing.
- the channel select filters that can be implemented as poly-phased filters can be set for a given operating bandwidth of 1.3, 5, 10 or 15 MHz, operating at any position within the forward-link cellular or PCS or desired frequency spectrum.
- the Signal Conditioning unit 2318 may be implemented by a variety of technologies such as FPGAs, ASICs and general purpose DSPs such as Texas Instruments TMS320C6416-7E3 processor.
- the Signal Conditioning unit 2318 includes appropriate interfaces and memory.
- the Signal Conditioning unit 2318 is connected to Digital-to-Analogue Converter (DA/C) unit 2320 .
- the DA/C unit 2320 includes post filtering that is appropriate the digital to analogue conversion.
- the DA/C unit 2320 is connected to frequency converter unit 2321 .
- Frequency converter unit 2321 up-converts the frequencies of the input signal to the original band of cellular frequencies.
- the frequency converter unit 2321 includes appropriate filtering for the correct operation of the transmitter chain.
- the operating frequency of the frequency converter unit 2321 is set by micro-controller unit 2350 .
- the frequency converter unit 2321 is connected to the variable gain amplifier unit 2322 , which is connected to the directional coupler unit 2325 .
- the gain of the VG amplifier unit 2322 is set by micro-controller unit 2350 .
- the directional coupler unit 2325 is connected to the calibration signal generator and transmitter unit 2323 and the duplex filter 2324 .
- the calibration signal generator and transmitter unit 2323 is also connected to the micro-controller 2350 .
- the duplex filter 2324 is connected to RF switch 2326 .
- the antennas 2328 and 2330 are both connected to the RF switch 2326 .
- the RF switch unit 2326 is connected to the duplex filter 2324 .
- the RF switch unit 2326 is also connected to micro-controller 2350 .
- the duplex filter unit 2324 is connected to LNA unit 2332 .
- the LNA unit 2332 is connected to the directional coupler unit 2334 .
- the directional coupler unit 2334 is connected to the frequency converter unit 2335 .
- Frequency converter 2335 is connected to Automatic Gain Control (AGC) unit 2336 .
- AGC Automatic Gain Control
- the frequency converter 2335 converts the frequency band of the incoming signal from the cellular band to baseband, or “near baseband” frequency band.
- the frequency converter unit 2335 includes filtering for the correct operation of the receiver chain.
- the operating frequency of the frequency converter unit 2335 is set by micro-controller unit 2350 .
- the directional coupler unit 2334 is also connected to calibration signal receiver unit 2348 .
- the frequency converter unit 2335 is connected to AGC unit 2336 .
- the AGC unit 2336 is connected to Analogue-to-Digital Converter (AD/C) unit 2338 .
- the AGC 2336 is optional, and its task is to place the received signal level substantially close to the middle of the dynamic range of the AD/C 2338 . If included, design and operation of the unit 2336 are configured so that in the presence of low signal power, noise within the operating bandwidth does not dominate the operation of the AGC unit 2336 .
- the AD/C unit 2338 supports a suitable dynamic range, which can be as high as 144 dB (24-bits).
- the AD/C unit 2338 is connected to Signal Conditioning unit 2340 .
- the Signal Conditioning unit 2340 performs such tasks as channel select filtering for the desired operating frequency band, frequency conversion, signal level estimation, AGC algorithm, and any other features that usesignal conditioning and processing.
- the channel select filters that can be implemented as poly-phased filters can be set for a given operating bandwidth of 1.3, 5, 10 or 15 MHz, operating at any position within the forward-link cellular or PCS or desired frequency spectrum.
- the Signal Conditioning unit 2340 may be implemented by a variety of technologies such as FPGAs, ASICs and general purpose DSPs such as Texas Instruments TMS320C6416-7E3 processor.
- the Signal Conditioning unit 2340 includes appropriate interfaces and memory.
- the Signal Conditioning unit 2340 is connected to Digital-to-Analogue Converter (DA/C) unit 2342 .
- the DA/C unit 2342 includes post filtering that is appropriate the digital to analogue conversion.
- the DA/C unit 2342 is connected to the Frequency converter unit 2343 , which up-converts the frequencies of the input signal to the desired portion of cellular or PCS band of frequencies.
- the frequency converter unit 2343 includes filtering for the correct operation of the transmitter chain.
- the operating frequency of the frequency converter unit 2343 is set by micro-controller unit 2350 .
- the frequency converter unit 2343 is connected to the variable gain amplifier unit 2344 , which is connected to the directional coupler unit 2346 .
- the gain of the VG amplifier unit 2344 is set by micro-controller unit 2350 .
- the directional coupler unit 2346 is connected to the duplex filter 2310 .
- the duplex filter 2310 is connected to RF switch 2308 .
- the antennas 2304 and 2306 are both connected to the RF switch 2308 .
- a simple user interface unit 2351 which can be a keypad or simple dipswitch, is connected to micro-controller unit 2350 .
- Units 2305 , 2323 , 2313 , 2321 , 2348 , 2335 , 2343 , 2352 and 2350 are all connected to local oscillator unit 2356 , or derive their clock or reference frequencies from the local oscillator 2356 .
- the Signal Conditioning units 2318 and 2340 clock frequencies are derived from a local reference frequency 2356 provided by clock unit 2353 .
- the functional blocks for calibration signal generator and transmitter unit 2352 , and the calibration receiver unit 2348 can be included in the Signal Conditioning unit 2340 for the uplink, and in the Signal Conditioning unit 2318 for the downlink operation. Since the antenna units 2304 , 2306 , 2328 and 2330 are placed close to each other, antenna isolation can be provided by highly directional antennas, with increased front-to-back radiation ratios.
- the signals received through antenna units 2328 and 2330 are re-transmitted through the antenna units 2304 and 2306 , at a higher signal power. These re-transmitted signals can be received again through the antenna units 2330 and 2328 (and have been termed above as the “Up-link Returned-Signal”), causing a signal return path in the system that may cause instability in the operation of the booster.
- the booster unit 2302 it may be possible to reduce the magnitude of the returned signal (Up-link Returned-Signal) by various signal-processing techniques. The choice, design and effectiveness of a technique depends on system parameters and operating conditions.
- a delay of about 1 usec will ensure the time separation of the re-transmitted signal from the original received signal, and hence the ability to mitigate the re-transmitted signal, by the example channel filtering technique.
- the delay can be introduced in the Signal Conditioning unit 2340 , provided that there is a digital data buffer of sufficient size available.
- the Channel Filtering operation can also be performed by the Signal Conditioning unit 2340 , or can be performed by a separate ASIC or FPGA, connected to the AD/C unit 2338 , and the Signal Conditioning unit 2340 .
- the calibration signal can be used for channel estimation purposes, so that the amplitude and the phase of the overall channel response (including the return path) can be estimated, for the setting of the Channel Filter taps.
- Channel Filter in the signal path also has an impact on the operation of the antenna diversity scheme. Because channel estimation is performed, antenna switching operations are synchronized so that, out of possible four, only two possible propagation channels exist. Since the antenna switching (selection) is under the control of micro-controller unit 2350 , channel estimation can be performed for both propagation paths, and two sets of Channel Filter coefficients can be determined for filtering operation. Therefore, it is possible to select (or switch to) the relevant filter coefficients, synchronized and in harmony with the antenna selection operation.
- the Channel Filtering mechanism is not used to totally mitigate the returned signal but rather to suppress the signal sufficiently so that some system gain is possible for the signal boosting operation. Introduction of the “deliberate delay” may also be used in conjunction with any other known signal-processing algorithm.
- the information can be used to locate a user in an indoor environment, for example by generating a heavily coded (protected), low bit rate data, containing a long known preamble, the unique identity code and optionally the longitude and the latitude of the unit 2302 .
- the information can then be pulse-shaped for low spectral leakage and superimposed on the reverse-link signal of a given channel by an appropriate modulation scheme, within the unit 2302 .
- the choice of the modulation scheme depends on the operating cellular system. For example, for GSM, which enjoys a constant envelope modulation such as GMSK, amplitude modulation (with low modulation index) can be used.
- amplitude modulation with low modulation index
- DBPSK can be used as the modulation scheme. Extraction of information from the received channel signal at base station may involve base station receiver modifications, but does not effect the normal operation of the cellular link.
- FIG. 16 An example of the system operational flow diagrams is shown in the FIG. 16 .
- the VG amplifiers 2322 and 2344 gain are always set to minimum and are switched “OFF”.
- the system is said to be “operational” when VG amplifiers 2322 and 2344 are switched “ON”, after the correct gain setting by instruction from micro-controller 2350 .
- the operation starts (step 2402 ), with the micro-controller 2350 instructs the reverse-link calibration receiver 2348 to scan for all possible code offsets (step 2404 ).
- the received signal powers are stored (step 2408 ). If no substantial signal is detected (step 2410 ), the micro-controller 2350 instructing the forward-link calibration receiver 2305 to scan for all possible code offsets (step 2410 ). If a substantial signal power transmitted by other units, operating within the same geographical area, is detected by the receiver unit 2305 (step 2416 ), the received signal powers are stored (step 2414 ). After the test for all possible code offsets is finished for the forward and reverse links of the system, and if other units signal power detected (step 2417 ), the received signals for each offset are tested and the largest signal power is selected (step 2412 ).
- the unit 2302 displays an error message (step 2419 ) and stops operation (step 2422 ). If the selected signal power is below the safe threshold, the unit proceeds to step 2420 . If no substantial signal is detected or the detected signals are below the safe threshold (step 2416 ), the micro-controller 2350 selects an unused code offset (step 2420 ) and instructs both the forward and reverse link calibration signal generator and transmitter units 2323 and 2352 , which have not been transmitting so far, to commence transmission (step 2424 ). The micro-controller 2350 also instructs the forward and reverse calibration receivers 2305 , 2348 to receive signal with the selected code offset (step 2425 ).
- the micro-controller 2350 calculates the Up-link and Down-link system gains, G u1 and G d1 , and the subsequent variable amplifier gains for the forward and reverse links (step 2426 ).
- Micro controller 2350 sets the gains of the forward and reverse link variable gain amplifier units 2322 & 2346 to the calculated levels, which so far have been at a minimum and “OFF” (step 2428 ).
- the system commences full operation (step 2430 ), with the variable gain amplifier units 2322 & 2346 switched “ON”.
- the example provided here can be applied to the booster system described here to combat the effect of mentioned feed-back loop and the above mentioned Up-link Returned-Signal that may exist in the reverse-link of the system and Down-link Returned-Signal that may exist in the forward-link of the system.
- the “Channel Filtering” technique, discussed here, for the forward and the reverse links is autonomous and can either be applied to both or just one of the forward or the reverse links of the system, and can be implemented in the Network unit 1002 or the User unit 2002 , or both.
- a simplified block diagram of the booster is shown in FIG.
- the processing and propagation delays within the booster system can be categorized as the following:
- the overall impulse response of the booster unit 2451 is shown in 2464 .
- the original incident pulse, entering from antenna 2462 (A 1 ), arrives at the input to the Network unit 2452 receiver after a delay of ⁇ f , (the pulse is marked as 2468 ), where: ⁇ f ⁇ Us + ⁇ P1 ⁇ P1
- the pulse is amplified and transmitted 2470 , after the “deliberate” time delay ⁇ d , from antenna 2456 (marked A 4 in FIG. 17 ).
- the transmitted signal re-enters the antenna 2462 (A 1 ) after the propagation delay ⁇ P2 , and arrives at the input to the Network unit 2452 receiver after a delay of ⁇ f (marked as 2472 ).
- ⁇ t ⁇ Nrx + ⁇ d + ⁇ Ntx + ⁇ P2 + ⁇ f ⁇ d + ⁇ P1 + ⁇ P2
- the returned pulse 2472 is delayed by the propagation path delays ⁇ P1 and ⁇ P2 , which can be very small in the booster's operating environment.
- the “deliberate” delay is introduced to sufficiently separate the Up-link Returned-Signal from the original incident pulse, such that filter coefficients can be estimated easily, and filtering can be performed more effectively.
- Introduction of another “deliberate” delay in the transmit path of the User unit 2454 ensures separation of the boosted transmitted pulse and the Up-link Returned-Signal, a condition that may be desirable to reduce the effect of the multipath experienced by the boosted transmitted pulse on the operation of the Channel filtering.
- the “Channel Filtering” unit 2512 (in FIG. 18 ) is placed only on the reverse-link of the Network unit 1002 .
- the channel filtering process involves estimating the complex propagation channel impulse response, including amplitude and phase for all time delays, up to the maximum expected multipath delay.
- the complex channel impulse response, C(t, ⁇ ) can be provided by the calibration signal receiver unit 1016 shown in FIG. 12 , as the information is readily available at the output of the unit, for the reverse-link path of the system. Note that based on the described design of the calibration signal mechanism shown in FIG. 12 (also FIG.
- the channel impulse response, provided by the calibration signal receiver unit 1016 will not include the delay contributions of the “deliberate” delay ( ⁇ d ), and the ⁇ Nrx + ⁇ Ntx components. While ⁇ Nrx + ⁇ Ntx is sufficiently small to ignore, the “deliberate” delay ( ⁇ d ) is added in the overall impulse response, in the Network unit 1002 , for the estimation of the Channel Filter coefficients. Similarly, if Channel Filtering operation is also used for the forward-link, a separate complex channel impulse response is used for the link. As a result, a similar calibration technique to the reverse-link is performed on the forward-link.
- FIG. 18 An example of the estimated power of the channel impulse response, C(t ⁇ ), 2510 , at the output of the calibration signal receiver 1016 is shown in FIG. 18 .
- the impulse response 2510 is for a maximum delay of 1 usec, assuming a calibration signal PN code chipping rate of 5 Mchips/sec and 2 samples per chip.
- C(t, ⁇ ) 2510 has three substantial distinguishable propagation paths at delays of 0.2 (P 1 ), 0.4 (P 2 ) and 1.0 (P 3 ) usec respectively.
- the maximum expected time delay corresponds to a signal path of about 300 meters, which is reasonable for the booster range and operational environment.
- FIG. 18 shows the Channel Filter unit 2512 .
- the FIR filter 2506 output is connected to one of the inputs of the adder unit 2504 , and the input of the FIR filter unit 2506 is connected to the output of the adder unit 2504 .
- the other input of the adder unit 2504 is connected to the AD/C 2502 .
- the AD/C is the unit 1046 in FIG. 12 .
- the FIR filter 2506 will produce a replica of the received signal, at the desired time delay with the respective complex coefficient specifying the magnitudes and the phases of the received Up-link Returned-Signal, to “wipe off” the incoming first (P 1 ), second (P 2 ) and third (P 3 ) return signal components.
- the FIR filter 2506 can either be implemented by a FPGA, ASIC or by the Signal Conditioning unit 1048 in FIG. 12 .
- the processes of channel estimation, C(t, ⁇ ), and hence up-dating the FIR filter 2506 filter coefficients, are performed continuously, with an update rate that depends on the channel coherence time.
- a value of 100 msec can be assumed, as the indoor channels exhibit large coherence time.
- an adaptive algorithm such as Normalized LMS (NLMS), or RLS, converging on the received calibration signal at the Network unit 1002 , to estimate the filter coefficients, on an on-going basis.
- FIG. 30 shows an example of analogue implementation of the Network unit 600 using a transmission cable as the physical medium for communication with the User unit 20 ( 702 in FIG. 6 ).
- the Network unit 602 shown in FIG. 5 is modified to the unit 3005 shown in FIG. 30 to transmit to, and receive signals from, the User unit 4005 ( FIG. 20 ), which is modified version of the User unit 702 shown in FIG. 6 , over a cable capable of supporting the operating bandwidth and the frequencies of the Network unit 3005 and User unit 4005 signals.
- the cable interface unit 3020 consists of a line interface unit 3160 which is connected to the transmission/reception cable 3170 and two hybrid combiners 3140 and 3150 on the forward-link and 3150 on the reverse link of the Network sub unit 3010 .
- the line interface unit 3160 will provide the means for the load matching for connection to a transmission line 3170 , and other appropriate components such as the amplifiers, modulation and frequency converters (modem functionalities), for reliable transmission over the transmission line 3170 .
- the design of the line interface unit 3160 is dependent on the transmission line 3170 characteristics, and is well known in the art. For example, even the in-building power lines or telephone lines can be used as the transmission line 3170 (as in homePNA), where the line interface unit 3160 is designed for such operation.
- the hybrid combiner (or directional coupler) 3140 is used to combine the control link 3110 signal with the forward-link signal.
- the outputs of the directional coupler unit 3040 and the control link unit 3110 can directly be connected to line interface unit 3160 , where they are modulated on adjacent carriers for simultaneous transmission to the User unit 4005 .
- the hybrid combiner (or directional coupler) 3150 is used to extract sufficient signal for reception and detection of control link 3110 received signal.
- the inputs to the directional coupler unit 3130 and the control link unit 3110 can directly be connected to line interface unit 3160 , if the control and data signals are modulated on adjacent carriers for simultaneous transmission from the User unit 4005 .
- hybrid combiners instead of the directional couplers 3040 , 3130 and 3085 .
- the operation of the units 3015 , 3030 , 3050 , 3120 , 3110 , 3060 , 3100 , 3105 , 3070 , 3074 , 3078 , 3080 , 3085 , 3040 , 3130 and 3090 in FIG. 30 is similar, in operation and description, to 640 , 624 , 604 , 620 , 628 , 606 , 626 , 627 , 614 , 610 , 608 , 612 , 618 , 630 , 616 and 622 respectively, as discussed for FIG. 5 .
- the directional coupler 3040 ( 630 in FIG. 5 ) is connected to hybrid combiner 3140
- the directional coupler 3130 616 in FIG. 5
- hybrid combiner 3150 is connected to hybrid combiner 3150 .
- FIG. 20 shows an example of analogue implementation of the User unit 702 ( FIG. 6 ) using a transmission cable as the physical medium for communication with the Network unit 3005 ( 602 in FIG. 5 ).
- the User unit 702 shown in FIG. 6 is modified to the unit 4005 shown in FIG. 20 to transmit to, and receive signals from, the Network unit 3005 , which is a modified version of the Network unit 602 shown in FIG. 5 , over a cable capable of supporting the operating bandwidth and the frequencies of the Network 3005 and User 4005 units signals.
- the cable interface unit 4020 consists of a line interface unit 4150 which is connected to the transmission/reception cable 4160 and two hybrid combiners 4130 on the forward-link and 4140 on the reverse link of the User sub unit 4010 .
- the line interface unit 4150 will provide the means for the load matching for connection to a transmission line 4160 , and other suitable components such as the amplifiers, modulation and frequency converters (modem functionalities), for reliable transmission over the transmission line 4160 .
- the design of the line interface unit 4150 is dependent on the transmission line 4160 characteristics, and is well known in the art. For example, even the in-building power lines or telephone lines can be used as the transmission line 4160 (as in homePNA), where the line interface unit 4150 is designed for such operation.
- the hybrid combiner (or mixer or directional coupler) 4140 is used to combine the control link 4120 signal with the reverse-link signal.
- the hybrid combiner (or duplexer) 4130 is used to extract sufficient signal for reception and detection of control link 4120 received signal.
- the operation of the units 4015 , 4030 , 4040 , 4050 , 4060 , 4070 , 4075 , 4080 , 4090 , 4100 , 4110 and 4120 in FIG. 20 is similar, in operation and description, to 722 , 734 , 736 , 732 , 730 , 728 , 721 , 724 , 726 , 716 , 718 and 720 respectively, as discussed for FIG. 6 .
- the directional coupler 4110 ( 718 in FIG. 6 ) is connected to hybrid combiner 4130
- the Reverse-link User unit 4090 ( 726 in FIG. 6 ) is connected to hybrid combiner 4140 .
- Network unit 3010 is similar to the operation of the Network unit 602 and the operation of User unit 4010 is similar to the operation of the User unit 702 .
- FIGS. 7, 8 , 9 , 10 and 11 can also be used for the digital implementation of the Network unit 3005 and User unit 4005 , which is discussed above in FIGS. 19 and 20 .
- FIG. 40 shows an example of digital implementation of the Network unit 5005 ( 1002 in FIG. 12 ), using a transmission cable as the physical medium for communication with the User unit 6005 ( 2002 in FIG. 13 ).
- the Network unit 1002 shown in FIG. 12 is modified to the unit 5005 shown in FIG. 40 to transmit to, and receive signals from, the User unit 6005 (in FIG. 50 ), which is the modified version of the User unit 2002 shown in FIG. 13 , over a cable capable of supporting the operating bandwidth and the frequencies of the Network 5005 and User 6005 units signals.
- the modified cable interface unit 5020 consists of a line interface unit 5220 , which is connected to the transmission/reception cable 5210 and the Line Modem unit 5250 .
- the line interface unit 5220 and the Line Modem unit 5250 will provide the means for the load matching for connection to transmission line 5210 , and other suitable components such as the amplifiers, modulation and frequency converters, for reliable transmission over the transmission line 5210 .
- the design of the line interface unit 5220 is dependent on the transmission line 5210 characteristics, and is well known in the art. For example, even the in-building power lines or telephone lines can be used as the transmission line 5210 (as in homePNA), where the line interface unit 5220 is designed for such operation.
- the line modem unit 5250 may be used for modulation and demodulation AD/C, DA/C and all other modem functionalities for transmission of the signal generated by the unit 5010 and reception of signal generated by unit 6010 .
- the design of the modem unit 5250 is well known in the art, and as example technologies, homePNA and Home Networking can be mentioned.
- the line modem unit 5250 is connected to data muliplexer unit 5260 and data demultiplexer unit 5270 .
- the line modem unit 5250 can be implemented in either analogue or digital technology (or a mix). In the example it is assumed that the line modem unit 5250 is implemented in digital domain.
- Data multiplexer unit 5260 is also connected to Signal Conditioning unit 5110 and the control link unit 5145 , and is used to multiplex control samples generated by control link unit 5145 and the signal samples generated by the Signal Conditioning unit 5110 .
- the multiplexer unit 5260 can be integrated within the Signal Conditioning unit 5110 .
- the output of the Signal Conditioning unit 5110 and control link unit 5140 can be separately connected to the line modem unit 5250 , where they are modulated on adjacent carriers for simultaneous transmission to the User unit 6005 .
- Data Demultiplexer unit 5270 is also connected to Signal Conditioning unit 5130 and the control link unit 5145 , and is used to demultiplex received control samples and the signal samples generated by the User unit 6005 .
- the demultiplexer unit 5270 can be integrated within the Signal Conditioning unit 5130 .
- the input to the Signal Conditioning unit 5130 and control link unit 5145 can be separately connected to the line modem unit 5250 , if the control and data signals are modulated on adjacent carriers for simultaneous transmission by the User unit 6005 .
- the calibration signal receiver unit ( 1016 in FIG. 12 ) is no longer implemented separately. As no analogue signal path is available in the reverse-link of the Network unit 5005 , the calibration signal receiver unit ( 1016 in FIG. 12 ) is integrated and performed in the Signal Conditioning unit 5130 .
- the operation of the units 5110 , 5120 , 5130 , 5140 , 5141 , 5145 , 5300 , 5100 , 5150 , 5090 , 5160 , 5080 , 5170 , 5070 , 5180 , 5190 , 5060 , 5050 , 5040 and 5030 in FIG. 30 is similar, in operation and description, to 1022 , 1024 , 1048 , 1060 , 1061 , 1062 , 1070 , 1020 , 1050 , 1018 , 1052 , 1014 , 1054 , 1012 , 1056 , 1058 , 1010 , 1008 , 1004 and 1006 respectively, as discussed for FIG. 12 .
- FIG. 50 shows an example of digital implementation of the User unit 6005 ( 2002 in FIG. 13 ) using a transmission cable as the physical medium for communication with the Network unit 5005 ( 1002 in FIG. 12 ).
- the User unit 2002 shown in FIG. 13 is modified to the unit 6005 , shown in FIG. 50 , to transmit to, and receive signals from, the Network unit 5005 , which is a modified version of the Network unit 1002 , shown in FIG. 12 , over a cable capable of supporting the operating bandwidth and the frequencies of the Network 5005 and User 6005 units signals.
- the modified cable interface unit 6020 consists of a line interface unit 6230 which is connected to the transmission/reception cable 6240 and the line modem unit 6220 .
- the line interface unit 6230 and the Line Modem unit 6220 will provide the means for the load matching for connection to transmission line 6240 , and other suitable components such as the amplifiers, modulation and frequency converters, for reliable transmission over the transmission line 6240 .
- the design of the line interface unit 6230 is dependent on the transmission line 6240 characteristics, and is well known in the art. For example, even the in-building power lines or telephone lines can be used as the transmission line 6240 (as in homePNA), where the line interface unit 6230 is designed for such operation.
- the line modem unit 6220 may be used for modulation and demodulation, AD/C, DA/C and all other functionalities for transmission of the signal generated by the unit 6010 and reception of signal generated by unit 5005 .
- the design of the modem unit 6220 is well known in the art, and as example technologies, homePNA and Home Networking can be mentioned.
- the line modem unit 6220 is connected to data muliplexer unit 6200 and data demultiplexer unit 6210 .
- the line modem unit 6220 can be implemented in either analogue or digital technology (or a mix). In the example it is assumed that the line modem unit 6220 is implemented in digital domain.
- Data multiplexer unit 6210 is also connected to Signal Conditioning unit 6140 and the control link unit 6150 , and is used to multiplex control samples generated by control link unit 6150 and the signal samples generated by the Signal Conditioning unit 6140 .
- the multiplexer unit 6210 can be integrated within the Signal Conditioning unit 6140 .
- the output of the Signal Conditioning unit 6140 and control link unit 6150 can be separately connected to the line modem unit 6220 , where they are modulated on adjacent carriers for simultaneous transmission to the Network unit 5005 .
- Data Demultiplexer unit 6200 is also connected to Signal Conditioning unit 6100 and the control link unit 6150 , and is used to demultiplex received control samples and the signal samples generated by the User unit 5005 .
- the demultiplexer unit 6200 can be integrated within the Signal Conditioning unit 6100 .
- the input to the Signal Conditioning unit 6100 and control link unit 6150 can be separately connected to the line modem unit 6220 , if the control and data signals are modulated on adjacent carriers for simultaneous transmission by the Network unit 5005 .
- the operation of the units 6150 , 6100 , 6110 , 6140 , 6155 , 6151 , 6120 , 6130 , 6090 , 6160 , 6170 , 6080 , 6180 , 6070 , 6190 , 6060 , 6050 , 6030 and 6040 in FIG. 50 is similar, in operation and description, to 2056 , 2020 , 2022 , 2046 , 2054 , 2055 , 2021 , 2023 , 2024 , 2044 , 2042 , 2026 , 2040 , 2028 , 2038 , 2030 , 2032 , 2034 , and 2036 respectively, as discussed for FIG. 13 .
- control-flow description given for FIGS. 7, 8 , 9 , 10 and 11 can also be used for the digital implementation of the Network unit 5005 and User unit 6005 , which is discussed above in FIGS. 21 and 22 .
- Network unit 5010 is similar to the operation of the Network unit 1002 and the operation of User unit 6010 is similar to the operation of the User unit 2002 .
Abstract
Description
- The existing cellular networks, such as (Global System for Mobile Communications (GSM) and IS95, are intended to provide a contagious and continuous coverage, so as to support the high terminal mobility expected from such systems. However, despite careful network design, indoor (in-building) coverage, or the coverage of places with high shadowing attenuation (e.g. tunnels) of such networks is often “patchy”, with “coverage Holes” at best, and no coverage at worst. The reason for the impaired indoor coverage is that the cellular base stations are usually placed outside buildings, higher than the average building heights, to provide large area coverage. Although the signal may be adequate at “street-level”, it is severely attenuated by the building material, reducing the signal power in-building, resulting in the poor converges. Loss of signal power (attenuation) depends on the building material and can be tens of dBs for each wall penetration. The problem is exacerbated in the 3rd generation systems such as Wideband Code Division Multiple Access (WCDMA) and cdma2000, as these new systems have the capability of high data transmission, which results in lower information bit energy (Eb), and much reduced link budget and cell foot-print. Currently, the common solutions for providing indoor coverage are:
-
- I) More outdoor base stations in the same geographical area, supporting smaller cell sizes.
- II) Microcells.
- III) Picocells (in-building cells).
- IV) Conventional repeaters.
- Clearly all the above solutions (except the repeater solution) are very expensive and involve extensive investment in the cellular network infrastructure and are much more complex in planning and operation. There are other solutions such as repeaters that can be used to boost the signal in a given geographical area.
- The repeater solution, although cheaper than a base station, has several drawbacks. These outdoor repeaters are still too expensive for a private user, and involve careful planning. Most use large directional antennas, or additional backhaul frequencies to reduce antenna gain specifications, which results in lower spectral efficiency and are capacity limited. The repeaters often cause increased interference in the network, as they are outdoor devices, similar to base stations, and hence are not popular as a viable solution for providing high performance indoor coverage. The indoor repeaters are still cheaper than the outdoor version, but typically involve installation of high directional antennas on the roof, and ensured antenna isolation, creating costly demand for skilled installation and operation. Therefore, the system generally remains too complicated for an unskilled user and not sufficiently inexpensive for usage in a very localized coverage area.
- In accordance with an embodiment of a communication device, a repeater mediates traffic between a network transceiver and a user transceiver in a wireless communication system. The repeater comprises a network unit that maintains a network link with the network transceiver, a user unit that maintains a user link with the user transceiver, a two-way communication pathway between the network unit and the user unit; that facilitate the communication of signals between the network transceiver and the user transceiver in autonomous repeater hops between the network transceiver and the network unit, between the user transceiver and the user unit, and between the network unit and the user unit, and a gain controller that compensates for propagation losses between the network unit and user unit alone.
- Embodiments of the invention relating to both structure and method of operation, may best be understood by referring to the following description and accompanying drawings whereby:
-
FIG. 1 is a schematic block diagram illustrating an embodiment of a cellular network with two base stations; -
FIG. 2 is a schematic block diagram depicting an embodiment of a forward-link part of a repeater; -
FIG. 3 is a schematic block diagram showing an embodiment of a reverse-link part of a repeater; -
FIG. 4 is a schematic block diagram illustrating an embodiment of a system including a Network unit and a User unit; -
FIG. 5 is a schematic block diagram that illustrates an embodiment of a system including a Network unit implementing antenna diversity; -
FIG. 6 is a schematic block diagram depicting an embodiment of a repeater that uses two antennas for antenna diversity; -
FIGS. 7-11 are flow charts depicting embodiments of system operation flow for a network unit (7-9) and a user unit (10-11); -
FIGS. 12 and 13 are schematic block diagrams showing embodiments of digital repeater implementations; -
FIG. 14 is a schematic block diagram showing an embodiment of an analog implementation of a back-to-back repeater; -
FIG. 15 is a schematic block diagram showing an embodiment of a digital implementation of a back-to-back repeater; -
FIG. 16 is a flow chart showing an embodiment of operation flow of a back-to-back repeater; -
FIGS. 17 and 18 are a simplified block diagram to illustrate a channel filtering operation; -
FIGS. 19-22 are schematic block diagrams showing other repeater embodiments. - The system disclosed herein provides better, and localized indoor coverage without causing excess interference in the network, usage of costly equipment or network planning. The system increases the overall network capacity, reducing the mobile and BTS transmit power, increasing the battery life and reducing the “harmful” radiation to the user.
- Descriptions of the illustrated embodiments are based on a GSM (Global System for Communications) network, which is a TDMA based system operating at various spectrum bands, depending on the country and the region's regulations. However, the disclosure, with minor modifications, is equally applicable to any other cellular system, including (but not limited to) IS95, cdma2000 and WCDMA, and wireless LAN systems such as 802.11a, b, and g. Although the description is given for cellular systems, with minor modifications, it can equally be applied to other systems such as GPS or any other system that uses signal-boosting capability. The operating frequency can be at any desired part of communications spectrum used for mobile communications (e.g. PCS 1900, or DCS1800 or GSM900 or UMTS 2000, ISM or UNII band). The description here is only intended as an example and as such utilization of the booster is not only limited to the in-building coverage and can be used in other places such as trains, planes, cars, tunnels, etc. Also, the example may not include all minute or unimportant design details. Units and sub-units discussed and explained hereafter meet regulations of the respective licensed and unlicensed band of operation. Therefore, for the different example implementations and embodiments disclosed, specifications including maximum transmit power, spectral mask, out of band radiation, and others for transmitters, receivers, repeaters and boosters, are met for both licensed and unlicensed bands of operation.
-
FIG. 1 shows acellular network 100 with two base stations (BTS1 (101) & BTS2 (102)). A typical network supports more than two base stations. The disclosed system may be applied in any size network, regardless of the supported number of base stations. BTS1 101 is connected to Base Station Controller BSC1 107. BTS2 102 is connected to Base Station Controller BSC2 108. BTS2 102 can also be connected to Base Station Controller BSC1 107, instead ofBSC2 108. BSC1 107 is connected to Mobile Switching Center MSC 109.BSC2 108 is connected to MSC 109, or instead may be connected to another MSC in the network. MSC 109 is connected to PSTN 110. BTS1 101 has an associatedcoverage area 103. BTS2 102 has an associatedcoverage area 104. These coverage areas may or may not overlap. However, usually the network is planned such that there is considerable overlap, to facilitate handoffs. The mobile terminal 105 is inside building 106, in thecoverage area 103 communicating with BTS1 101, using a traffic channel transmitted at around frequency f1 in the forward-link and its associated reverse-link frequency, f1′. The traffic channel can be one of the available time slots on the BCCH carrier, or may be on a TCH carrier, where frequency hopping may be used to reduce interference. Mobile terminal 105 may or may not be incoverage area 104, but the mobile unit 105 is well within thecoverage area 103 and average signal power from BTS1 101 is much stronger than the average signal power fromBTS2 102, within the building 106, and the locality of mobile unit 105. Root-mean-square (rms) forward-link signal level Ŝ1, outside the building 106 is higher than the rms signal level Ŝ2 inside the building by the wall penetration loss α. The loss a may be such that Ŝ2 is not at sufficiently high level for the User unit 105 to maintain reliable communication with BTS1 101, orBTS2 102, or both BTS1 101 andBTS2 102. Further, the signal level Ŝ2 may be such that mobile unit 105 may have difficulty to setup and maintain a communication link with BTS1 101 or BTS2 102, or both BTS1 101 andBTS2 102, or the communication link does not have the desired performance and reliability, in all or some of the in-building areas. The coverage problem inside the building 106 may be solved by more transmit power from BTS1 101 in the down-link to combat the signal loss, by the wall penetration loss, a. The r.m.s. reverse-link signal level Ŝ1, inside the building 106 is higher than the r.m.s. signal level Ŝ′2, outside the building, by the wall penetration loss α′. The loss α′ may be such that Ŝ′2 is not at sufficiently high level for the User unit 105 to maintain reliable communication with BTS1 101, orBTS2 102, or both BTS1 101 andBTS2 102. Further, the signal level Ŝ′2 may be such that mobile unit 105 may have difficulty to setup and maintain a communication link with BTS1 101 or BTS2 102, or both BTS1 101 andBTS2 102, or the communication link does not have the desired performance and reliability, in all or some of the in-building areas. The coverage problem inside the building 106 may be solved by more transmit power from mobile unit 105 in the up-link to combat the signal loss, by the wall penetration loss, α′. Usually the forward and reverse link frequency pairs are sufficiently close, such that a level is substantially similar to α′ level. -
FIG. 2 depicts a forward-link part 230 of the repeater 200. The forward-link portion 230 in a simple form supplies improved indoor coverage by boosting the signal level in building in the forward-link of the cellular network. BTS1 213 has a BCCH radio channel (beacon channel) transmitted substantially close to f1. BTS1 213 is in communications with themobile unit 214 at a frequency substantially close to f1 (the BCCH carrier frequency) or another carrier frequency, f2, that may or may not be frequency hopping. There may or may not be other frequencies that are transmitted by BTS1 213, or other base stations in the same area, which are not shown in theFIG. 2 . - The device has two separate units, the “Forward-link Network unit” 201, which is placed where good signal coverage exists, indoor or outdoors, and the “Forward-link User unit” 202, which is placed where good signal coverage does not exist, indoor or outdoors. The Forward-
link Network unit 201 is connected to an antenna 203, tuned to operate at the cellular network operating frequency band. The Forward-link Network unit 201 is also connected to anantenna 204 tuned to operate at a suitable Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure (known as U-NII) bands, where the system is designed to operate at U-NII spectrum bands. Subject to the relevant regulations, the system can also be designed to operate at Unlicensed Personal Communications Services (U-PCS) band or at Industrial, Scientific and Medical (ISM) band of frequencies. The choice of the unlicensed frequency depends on the design of the equipment and the system specification. Frequencies defined in the portion of the radio spectrum known as U-NII bands may be implemented in some embodiments. Some design modifications are useful, for ISM band operation. The modifications are related to the minimum spreading factor of 10 specified for the ISM band operation, and the maximum allowed transmit power. If the system is designed to operate in ISM band, the signal may use further spread spectrum modulation/demodulation and other modifications to meet FCC 47 CFR Part-15, subpart E specifications. - The frequency bands defined for U-NII operations are as follows:
-
- 1) 5.15-5.25 GHz @ Max Transmit power of 2.5 mW/MHz
- 2) 5.25-5.35 GHz @ Max Transmit power of 12.5 mW/MHz
- 3) 5.725-5.825 GHz @ Max Transmit power of 50 mW/MHz
- Any unlicensed operation in U-NII band is allowed, as long as the signal transmissions meet FCC 47 CFR Part-15. So operation of the described booster generally complies with standards of the FCC 47 CFR Part-15 (subpart E for U-NII frequencies). Regulations commonly specify transmit power, emission limits, and the antenna gain limits and are implemented for an acceptable device.
- The “Forward-link User Unit” 202 is connected to an
antenna 205 tuned to operate in the same frequency band asantenna 204, which is U-NII band in some embodiments. The Forward-link User unit 202 is also connected to an antenna 206 tuned to operate at the cellular network operating band. - Antenna 203 is connected to a (Low Noise Amplifier)
LNA unit 207, which is further connected to abandpass filter 232.LNA unit 207 may be a high performance amplifier, with a typical gain of 15 dB and a noise figure of 1.5 dB with sufficient bandwidth to cover the appropriate portion of the spectrum. Thebandpass filter 232 can be designed to pass all or a desired part of the interested cellular spectrum, or can be a bank of overlapping bandpass filters, covering the full spectrum of the interested cellular system, with a RF switch, such that the desired band and bandwidth can be selected. Thebandpass filter 232 is connected tofrequency converter 208. Thefrequency converter 208 is capable of converting the cellular network operating spectrum band to a desirable part of the U-NII spectrum, and includes components such as mixers and filters for correct operation. Thefrequency converter 208 is connected to the Forward-linkNetwork unit transmitter 209. Thetransmitter unit 209 is designed to operate in U-NII band and conforms to the FCC 47 CFR Part-15, subpart E regulations, and can be as simple as a single amplifier operating at the desirable U-NII operation band, or more complex transmitter with amplifiers and filters, or even a WLAN transmitter such as 802.11a. Thetransmitter unit 209 is connected toantenna 204. -
Antenna 205 is connected to the Forward-linkUser unit receiver 210, which is designed to receive the signal transmitted byunit 201. Thereceiver 210 which is connected tofrequency converter 211, can be as simple as a single LNA operating at desirable U-NII band of device operation, or it can be better designed with additional functionalities such as variable attenuator and variable channel select filters, or even a WLAN receiver such as 802.11a (where the transmitter part of 802.11a is used in the Network unit 209).Frequency converter unit 211, which is connected toreceiver unit 210 and variablegain amplifier unit 212, converts the input signals, from U-NII band, to the cellular network operating frequencies, and includes all components such as mixers and filters for correct operation. Thefrequency converter unit 211 performs the opposite conversion operation of thefrequency converter unit 208, and includes all components such as mixers and filters for correct operation. Thefrequency converter 211 is connected to the Variable Gain (VG)amplifier 212, operating at the cellular network operating frequency band. Thevariable gain amplifier 212 is connected toantenna 208.Antenna 208 will be transmitting signals with substantially similar frequencies to the frequencies transmitted by base station 213, and meets cellular system specifications. - The signal radiated by
antenna 208, which is an amplified repeated version of the original incident signal received by antenna unit 203, will experience some loss in the power level, before returning and re-entering the antenna 203 again. The re-entered signal into antenna 203 is termed “Down-link Returned-Signal” hereafter. The ratio of the r.m.s. signal value of the Down-link Returned-Signal to the r.m.s. value of the original incident signal at the output of the antenna 203 terminator, with all the system and propagation path delays between theantenna units 208 and 203 removed, is the Down-link Returned-Signal path loss, and is termed here as the “Down-link System Path Loss” and referred to as PLd1. - Further, the “Down-link System Link Gain”, which is here referred to as Gd1, is defined as “the ratio of the r.m.s. signal value at the input to the
antenna 208 terminator, to the r.m.s. signal value, at the antenna 203 terminator, where the Down-link System Path Loss, PLd1, as defined above, is infinite (i.e. no EM coupling path betweenantenna 208 and antenna 203), and all the system and propagation path delays (from antenna 203, through the system to antenna 208) are removed”. - The variable
gain amplifier unit 212 gain is set such that Down-link System Link Gain, Gd1, is less than the Down-link System Path Loss, PLd1, by dgd1, so as to avoid a “positive feed-back” loop in the system, i.e.
G d1 =PL d1 −dg d1(dB) - Note that all values of PLd1, Gd1, and dgd1 are all in dB. The value of dgd1 ranges from 0 to PLd1, and can be assumed to be 3 dB for the purposes of the description here. However, it is possible to select better values for dgd1, where the system performance is optimized further.
-
FIG. 3 depicts an embodiment of the reverse-link part 330 of arepeater 300. The reverse-link portion 330 in a simple form improves indoor coverage by boosting signal level in building in the reverse-link of the cellular network to such level that attains acceptable link performance.BTS1 302 has a BCCH radio channel (beacon channel) transmitted substantially close to f1, and a frequency pair, f′1 on the reverse-link.BTS1 302 is in communications with themobile unit 324 at a frequency substantially close to f′1 (the BCCH carrier frequency) or another carrier frequency, f′2, that may or may not be frequency hopping. There may or may not be other frequencies that are transmitted byBTS1 302, or other base stations in the same area, which are not shown in theFIG. 3 . - The device has two separate units, the “Reverse-link Network unit” 326, which is placed where good signal coverage exists, indoor or outdoors, and the “Reverse-link User unit” 328, which is placed where good signal coverage does not exist, indoor or outdoors. The Reverse-link Network unit 326 is connected to an
antenna 304, tuned to operate at the cellular network operating frequency band. The Reverse-link Network unit 326 is also connected to anantenna 312 tuned to operate at a suitable Unlicensed National Information Infrastructure (U-NII) bands, where the system is designed to operate at U-NII bands. Subject to the relevant regulations, the system can also be designed to operate at Unlicensed Personal Communications Services (U-PCS) band or at Industrial, Scientific and Medical (ISM) band of frequencies. The choice of the unlicensed frequency depends on the design of the equipment and the system specification. Frequencies defined in the portion of the radio spectrum known as U-NII bands may be used in some system designs. Some design modifications are used for ISM band operation. The modifications are related to the minimum spreading factor of 10 used for ISM band operation, and the maximum allowed transmit power. If the system is designed to operate in ISM band, the signal uses further spread spectrum modulation/demodulation and other modifications to meet the FCC 47 CFR Part-15, subpart E specifications. - The frequency bands defined for U-NII operations are as follows:
-
- 1) 5.15-5.25 GHz @ Max Transmit power of 2.5 mW/MHz
- 2) 5.25-5.35 GHz @ Max Transmit power of 12.5 mW/MHz
- 3) 5.725-5.825 GHz @ Max Transmit power of 50 mW/MHz
- Any unlicensed operation in U-NII bands is allowed, as long as the signal transmissions meet with FCC 47 CFR Part-15. Operation of the illustrative booster meets specifications of FCC 47 CFR Part-15 (subpart E for U-NII frequencies).
- The “Reverse-link User Unit” 328 is connected to an
antenna 314 tuned to operate in the same frequency band asantenna 312, which is U-NII band for example. The Reverse-link User unit 328 is also connected to an antenna 322 tuned to operate at cellular network operating band. - Antenna 322 is connected to a
LNA unit 320, which is further connected to abandpass filter 321.LNA unit 320 may be a high performance amplifier with a typical gain of 15 dB and a noise figure of 1.5 dB with sufficient bandwidth to cover the appropriate portion of the spectrum. Thebandpass filter 321 can be designed to pass all or a desired part of the cellular spectrum, or can be a bank of overlapping bandpass filters, covering the full spectrum of the interested cellular system, with a RF switch, such that the desired band and bandwidth can be selected. Thebandpass filter 321 is connected tofrequency converter 318. Thefrequency converter 318 is capable of converting the cellular network operating spectrum band to a desirable part of the U-NII spectrum, and includes all components such as mixers and filters for correct operation. Thefrequency converter 318 is connected to the Reverse-linkUser unit transmitter 316. Thetransmitter unit 316 is designed to operate in U-NII band and conforms to the FCC 47 CFR Part-15, subpart E regulations, and can be as simple as a single amplifier operating at the desirable U-NII operation band, or a more complex transmitter with amplifiers and filters or even a WLAN transmitter such 802.11a. Thetransmitter unit 316 is connected toantenna 314. The desired portion of the U-NII band of operation for the reverse-link part of the booster is different to the desired portion of the U-NII band of operation for Forward-link part of the booster, and sufficiently apart, so that no substantial interference is experienced from the operation of one link, to the other. -
Antenna 312 is connected to the Reverse-linkNetwork unit receiver 310, which is designed to receive the signal transmitted byunit 328. Thereceiver 310 which is connected tofrequency converter 308, can be as simple as a single LNA operating at desirable U-NII band of device operation frequency, or it can be better designed with additional functionalities such as variable attenuator and variable channel select filters or even a WLAN receiver such as 802.11a (where the transmitter part of 802.11a is used in the User unit 316).Frequency converter unit 308, which is connected toreceiver unit 310 and variablegain amplifier unit 306, converts the input signals, from U-NII band, to the cellular network operating frequencies, and includes all components such as mixers and filters for correct operation. Thefrequency converter unit 308 performs the opposite conversion operation of thefrequency converter unit 318. Thefrequency converter 308 is connected to thevariable gain amplifier 306, operating at the cellular network operating frequency band. Thevariable gain amplifier 306 is connected toantenna 304.Antenna 304 will be transmitting signals with substantially similar frequencies to the frequencies transmitted bymobile unit 324. - The signal radiated by
antenna 304, which is an amplified repeated version of the original incident signal received by antenna unit 322, will experience some loss in the power level, before returning and re-entering the antenna 322 again. The re-entered signal into antenna 322 is termed “Up-link Retumed-Signal” hereafter. The ratio of the r.m.s. signal value of the Up-link Returned-Signal, to the r.m.s. value of the original incident signal, at the output of the antenna 322 terminator, with all the system and propagation path delays between theantenna units 304 and 322 removed, is the Up-link Returned-Signal path loss, and is termed here as the “Up-link System Path Loss” and referred to as PLu1. - Further, the “Up-link System Link Gain” which here is referred to as Gu1, is defined as “the ratio of the r.m.s. signal value at the input to the
antenna 304 terminator, to the r.m.s. signal value, at the antenna 322 terminator, where the Up-link System Path Loss, PLu1, as defined above, is infinite (i.e. no EM coupling path betweenantenna 304 and antenna 322), and all the system and propagation path delays (from antenna 322, through the system to antenna 304) are removed”. - The variable
gain amplifier unit 306 gain is set such that Up-link System Link Gain, Gu1, is less than the Up-link System Path Loss, PLu1, by dgu1, so as to avoid a “positive feed-back” loop in the system, i.e.
G u1 −PL u1 −dg u1(dB) - Note that all values of PLu1, Gu1, and dgu1 are in dB. The value of dgu1 ranges from 0 to PLu1, and can be assumed to be 3 dB for the purposes of the description here. However, it is possible to select better values for dgu1, where the system performance is optimized further.
- Usually the forward and the reverse links frequency pairs are sufficiently close, such that Gu1 level is substantially similar to Gdu1 level, and PLu1 level is substantially similar to PLd1 level and dgu1 level is substantially similar to dgd1 level.
- The unique booster unit identity code and optionally the device location can be transmitted to the cellular network. The information can be used to locate a user in an indoor environment, for example by generating a heavily coded (protected), low bit rate data containing a long known preamble, the unique identity code, optionally the longitude, and the latitude of the reverse-link Network unit 326. The information can then be pulse-shaped for low spectral leakage and superimposed on the reverse-link signal of a given channel by an appropriate modulation scheme, within the reverse-link Network unit 326. The choice of the modulation scheme depends on the operating cellular system. For example, for GSM, which enjoys a constant envelope modulation such as GMSK, amplitude modulation (with low modulation index) can be used. For CDMA systems with fast reverse-link power control, DBPSK can be used as the modulation scheme. Extraction of information from the received channel signal at base station may involve base station receiver modifications, but does not effect the normal operation of the cellular link.
-
FIG. 4 shows an embodiment of asystem 500 including theNetwork unit 502, together with theUser unit 504 in the same diagram. The Forward-link Network unit 514 (201 inFIG. 2 ) and the Reverse-link Network unit 516 (326 inFIG. 3 ) are now in one unit, referred to hereafter as theNetwork unit 502. The Forward-link User unit 518 (202 inFIG. 2 ) and the Reverse-link User unit 520 (328 inFIG. 3 ) are now in one User unit, referred to hereafter as theUser unit 504. InFIG. 4 , the transmit/receive antenna 203 inFIG. 2 and transmit/receiveantenna 304 inFIG. 3 are replaced by asingle antenna 506 andduplex filter 528. Theduplex filter unit 528 is designed for optimum performance, and meets specifications for cellular operation. Also, the transmit/receiveantenna 204 inFIG. 2 and transmit/receiveantenna 312 inFIG. 3 are replaced by asingle antenna 508 andduplex filter 526. Further, the transmit/receiveantenna 205 inFIG. 2 and transmit/receiveantenna 314 inFIG. 3 are replaced by a single antenna 510 and duplex filter 524 inFIG. 4 . Equally, the transmit/receiveantenna 208 inFIG. 2 and transmit/receive antenna 322 inFIG. 3 are replaced by a single antenna 512 and duplex filter 522 inFIG. 4 . The duplex filter unit 522 is designed for optimum performance, and complies with specifications for cellular operation. GSM system is a FDD system, and as such reverse-link frequencies are different to that of the forward-link frequencies. In such system a duplex filter provides appropriate functionality. However, if theNetwork unit 502 and theUser unit 504 are designed for a TDD system, theduplexers 528 and 522 can be replaced by hybrid combiners or “circulators”. However,duplexers 526 and 524 are still used, since forward-link and reverse-link frequencies in the U-NII band are kept separate (i.e. FDD). With minor modifications, it is possible that, instead ofantennas 508 and 510, a coaxial cable (such as RG58 or IS inch heliax) is used to connect theNetwork unit 502 to theUser unit 504. In such an arrangement, where coaxial cable is used for the link connection, although still possible, up-conversion to U-NII bands is superfluous, and the system can operate with the Forward and reverse-link signals kept at original cellular frequencies. - The described booster system typically operates satisfactorily in limited scenarios. To ensure the correct operation of the booster system in all propagation and operating conditions, several features may be included in the system design.
-
- 1. Since both the
Network unit 502 and theUser unit 504 are for most time stationary relative to each other, and possibly other network elements such as base stations, antenna (space) diversity is used for transmit and receive operations. - 2. The signals transmitted by
antenna 506, in the reverse-link, are substantially at the same operating frequency band as the reverse-link signals received by antenna unit 512. Equally, the signals transmitted by antenna 512, in the forward-link, are substantially at the same operating frequency band as the forward-link signals received byantenna unit 506. As the signals received by the Forward-link Network unit 514 are transmitted to Forward-link User unit 518, viaantenna units 508 and 510, and further, as the signal received by the Forward-link User unit 518 is then amplified before the retransmission via antenna unit 512, a feed-back loop, through theantennas 512 and 506, between the two Forward-link Network unit 502 and Forward-link User unit 518 exists. Any gain in the loop causes “positive feed-back”, which results in unstable operation, a phenomenon that is also true for reverse-link operation of theNetwork unit 502 and theUser unit 504. To keep the two feed-back loops in a stable operating region, in the forward-link the Down-link System Link Gain, Gd1, is less than the Down-link System Path Loss, PLd1, by dgd1, so as to avoid a “positive feed-back” loop in the system, i.e. Gd1=PLd1−dgd1 (dB). Equally, in the reverse-link, the Up-link System Link Gain, Gu1, is less than the Up-link System Path Loss, PLu1, by dgu1, so as to avoid a “positive feed-back” loop in the system. i.e. Gu1=PLu1−dgu1(dB). The propagation losses, PLu1 and PLd1, may be due to shadowing, distance, antenna radiation pattern and multipath propagation as well as wall penetration loss. The levels of these propagation losses, PLu1 and PLd1, are not readily available and are measured. - 3. Continuous and correct operation of the
Network unit 502 andUser unit 504 is monitored. Any operational problem at theNetwork unit 502 or theUser unit 504 can result in unwanted transmissions in either forward or reverse (or both) links. Further, the system may rely on radio channels operating at unlicensed frequency bands, which are prone to interference from other unlicensed devices. Also, operation of theNetwork unit 502 and theUser unit 504 is coordinated. Therefore a control-signaling channel is inserted between the twoNetwork 502 and theUser 504 units. - 4. The local oscillators of the
network unit 502 and theUser unit 504 are substantially similar in frequency, as any large frequency error between theNetwork 502 and theUser 504 units will result in an unacceptable cellular link performance. In some embodiments, a pilot signal can be transmitted in a control link from thenetwork unit 502 to theuser unit 504 and used for synchronization of local oscillators of the two units. In other examples, an electric power supply waveform can be used for synchronization of local oscillators in the two units.
- 1. Since both the
- Illustrative advanced features include design solutions that are useful in countering the enumerated problems.
-
FIG. 5 shows asystem 600 including the Network unit 602 (502 inFIG. 4 ) with the new design features included. Twoantennas single antenna 506 inFIG. 4 . Also twoantennas FIG. 4 . Although any diversity-combining scheme such as Maximal Ratio Combining, etc. can be used for the receiver chain, and transmit diversity schemes such as random phase change in one or both antennas for the transmitter chain, a simple scheme that is based on antenna switched diversity with “continuous switching” strategy is suggested here. The continuous switching strategy, with the switching rate selected for optimum performance (e.g. at, or twice, the GSM Timeslot rate which is 4.6 msec), can be used for both transmit and receive operation, and will result in a nominal average transmit/receive signal power, provided the antennas are placed sufficiently apart. The continuous-switch diversity scheme is also simple to implement, using only a simple RF switch at the antenna ports. Therefore, theRF switch 612 connected toantennas duplex filter 614 will provide switching operations for the cellular transmit/receive operation of theNetwork unit 602. Also the RF switch 634, connected toantennas Network unit 602. Theduplex filter 614 is connected to Forward-link Network unit 604 (514 inFIG. 4 ), and the Reverse-link Network unit 606 (516 inFIG. 4 ) via thedirectional coupler 618. Directional couplers may be 17 dB directional couplers. Also, the duplex filter 634 is connected to Forward-link Network unit 604 via thedirectional coupler 630, and Reverse-link Network unit 606 via thedirectional coupler 616. It is also possible to use hybrid combiners instead of thedirectional couplers Network receiver unit 310 internal LNA amplifier, before the directional coupler 616 (or the hybrid combiner replacement) in diagram 600. - A calibration signal generator/
transmitter unit 622 is coupled to the reverse-link transmitter path of theNetwork unit 602, via thedirectional coupler 618. Theunit 622 will provide a calibration signal, at the desired power levels, which is used to establish the level of the above-mentioned Up-link System Path Loss, PLu1, which exists between the Network unit 602 (502 inFIG. 4 ) and theUser unit 702 inFIG. 6 (504 inFIG. 4 ). The calibration signal generated byunit 622 is transmitted via thediversity antennas unit 622 is a direct-sequence spread spectrum signal modulated by a known Pseudo Random (PN) code with a known code phase (referred to hereafter as “own code” phase) and with a chipping rate comparable to the forward and reverse links of theNetwork unit 602 and User unit 702 (inFIG. 6 ) operating bandwidths. The code phases are selected such that the minimum code phase difference is larger than the maximum expected path delay (measured in multiple number of chips), and after that the code phases should be multiple integer of the minimum code phase. The calibrationsignal receiver unit 620 which is coupled to the reverse-link receive path of theNetwork unit 602, bydirectional coupler 616, using the known PN code and the transmit code phase is then capable of detecting and demodulating the calibration signal transmitted byunit 622, which has entered the reverse-link path via the mentioned closed-loop mechanism that exists between theNetwork unit 602 and theUser unit 702 inFIG. 6 (504 inFIG. 4 ). The calibrationsignal receiver unit 620 is capable of establishing the received signal strength, which is then used to estimate the Up-link System Path Loss, PLu1, that exists between the Network unit 602 (502 inFIG. 4 ) and theUser unit 702 inFIG. 6 (504 inFIG. 4 ). The calibrationsignal receiver unit 620 includes many sub-units, including a frequency converter similar to frequency converter unit 308 (inFIG. 3 ), to return the calibration signal, to its original operating frequency. The PN code phase can be assigned uniquely, or drawn according to a random algorithm, such that the probability of two units having the same code phase can be very low. Other code offset assignment strategies are also possible, such as dynamic assignment, where the code offset is selected, if no such offset was detected in that geographical area. The feature enables thecalibration signal receiver 620 to be able to scan and receive “other code” phases, and hence establishing if there is any other signal coupling to or from other units, that may be operating in the same geographical area. Further, more than one code phases can be used, to establish the Up-link System Path Loss, PLu1, so that the probability of detection by other systems is increased. The PN code used for the calibration signal can be modulated with information about the identity of theNetwork unit 602. The carrier frequency of the transmitted calibration signal may be at the operating cellular frequency band. However, carrier frequencies in other bands, such as ISM band at 2.4 GHz, may be used for transmission of the calibration signal so that the calibration signal generator andtransmitter 622 carrier frequency are placed as near as possible to the operating frequency band. The chipping rate and the transmit power of the calibration signal PN code is configured so that the calibration signal complies with the FCC 47 CFR Part-15 rules. Although the mentioned ISM band is not the same as the cellular operating band, nevertheless, the band is sufficiently close to enable the system to establish the antenna coupling and the Up-link and Down-link System Link Gains, (Gu1, Gd1), at the cellular operating band (the instantaneous amplitude and phase values are no longer relevant operating at ISM band). Any antenna and propagation differences in average signal power between the ISM and cellular operating bands can be investigated in the design phase and taken into account in the final system design. The calibration signal generator andtransmitter unit 622, and thecalibration signal receiver 620, are both in theNetwork unit 602, operating in the desired cellular band. However, one or both of the units including calibration signal generator andtransmitter unit 622, and thecalibration signal receiver 620, can also be placed in theUser unit 702, with certain modifications and considerations. In some cases, a calibration mechanism for the forward-link, similar to the one described for the reverse-link, includes parts such as the unit, 622, 618, 616 and 620, which can be placed in theUser unit 702. - Further, it can be assumed that Up-link System Path Loss, PLu1, and the Down-link System Path Loss, PLd1, are the same, i.e. PLd1≈PLu1. The assumption enables measurement of only one of the entities to be sufficient. Validity of the assumption can be investigated for each system, and should hold true if the frequency separation between the forward and reverse links of the system is not excessively high. The assumption simplifies description. However, if the assumption is not made, a similar technique may be used in the forward-link of the
Network unit 602, orUser unit 702 inFIG. 6 . - The Equipment ID and reference frequency unit 624 basically generates a Binary Phase Shift Keying (BPSK) signal, modulated by the equipment ID number and placed at a suitable part of U-NII band, and is coupled in the transmitter path of the forward-link of the
Network unit 602 via thedirectional coupler 630. The unit is “frequency locked” to the local oscillator of theNetwork unit 602. The carrier frequency of the signal is selected to avoid an unacceptable interference to the main cellular signal in the transmit path of the forward-link of theNetwork unit 602, but is sufficiently close for an optimum transmission bandwidth. Where theNetwork unit 602 and theUser unit 702 use the mains electricity supply for their operations, the 60 Hz or 50 Hz mains oscillations can be used to “lock” the local oscillators of the two units to a common frequency source. The 60 Hz or 50 Hz mains oscillations are converted, by suitable circuitry, to the desired frequency for the operation of theNetwork unit 602 and theUser unit 702. - The
Control Link unit 628 is a radio link between the two,Network unit 602 and theUser unit 702 inFIG. 6 . It may be a simple proprietary link that operates in one of the unlicensed band of frequencies, or may be an in-band control signaling, multiplex with the cellular signal path. It may also be a standard wireless link such as 802.11b, 802.11a or Bluetooth, designed to operate in unlicensed frequency band. Thecontrol link unit 628 is connected tomicro-controller unit 626, and is able to communicate through an appropriate interface. Thecontrol link unit 628 is also connected toantenna unit 602,antenna units control link unit 628. In some embodiments, theUser unit 702 can be a very simple device with all signal processing and control functionalities supported in theNetwork unit 602. If so, the control link can be eliminated or may implement very simple control signaling such as in-band frequency tones to set the system bandwidth and gain in theUser unit 702. Provided that the antenna bandwidth allows, with minor modifications tounit 602,antenna units control link unit 628 operations. -
Micro-controller unit 626 is a simple micro-processor such as ARM7 or ARM9 with all the appropriate memory and interfaces. Themicro-controller unit 626 is controlling the operation of theNetwork unit 602, and may perform some additional signal conditioning and processing such as signal level averaging and estimation, where useful. Some of the task of themicro-controller unit 626 is to set the operating bandwidth and gain of the forward and reverse links of theNetwork units User unit 702 inFIG. 6 , via thecontrol link unit 628, control and communicate with the calibration signal generator andtransmitter 622 andcalibration signal receiver 620. Other tasks of themicro-controller 626 are discussed later by way of an example given inFIGS. 7, 8 and 9.Micro-controller unit 626 is connected tounits -
Units local oscillator unit 640, and derive their clock and reference frequencies from thelocal oscillator 640 signal. - A simple
user interface unit 627, which can be a keypad or simple dipswitch, is connected tomicro-controller unit 626. - The
Network unit 602 has a unique “identity code”, which can be set by theuser interface unit 627, which is known to themicro-controller unit 626 and can be communicated to theUser unit 702micro-controller unit 728, or any other User units that may be within the operating range ofNetwork unit 602. -
FIG. 6 shows an embodiment of arepeater 700 including the User unit 702 (504 inFIG. 4 ) with the new design features included. Twoantennas FIG. 4 . Also, twoantennas FIG. 4 . Although any diversity-combining scheme such as Maximal Ratio Combining, etc. can be used for the receiver chain, and transmit diversity schemes such as random phase change in one or both antennas for the transmitter chain, a simple scheme that is based on antenna switched diversity with “continuous switching” strategy is suggested here. The continuous switching strategy, with the switching rate selected for optimum performance (e.g. at, or twice, the GSM Timeslot rate 4.6 msec), can be used for both transmit and receive operation, and will result in a nominal average transmit/receive signal power, provided the antennas are placed sufficiently apart. The continuous-switch diversity scheme can be easily implemented using a simple RF switch at the antenna ports. Therefore theRF switch 732 connected toantennas User unit 702. Also theRF switch 712 connected toantennas duplex filter 714 will provide switching operations for the U-NII band transmit/receive operation of theUser unit 702. Theduplex filter 712 is connected to Forward-link User unit 724 (518 inFIG. 4 ), via thedirectional coupler 718, and the Reverse-link User unit 726 (520 inFIG. 4 ). Also, theduplex filter 732 is connected to Forward-link User unit 724, and Reverse-link User unit 726. It is also possible to use a hybrid combiner instead of thedirectional coupler 718. It is also possible, and is more desirable, to place the Forward-link User unit 328receiver 210 internal LNA, before the directional coupler 718 (or the hybrid combiner replacement), in diagram 700. - The Reference
signal receiver unit 716, which is capable of receiving the transmitted signal generated by the equipment ID and reference frequency generator 624 inFIG. 5 , is connected to thedirectional coupler 718. The receiver is capable of extracting the reference frequency and the ID code transmitted by theNetwork unit 602 equipment ID and reference frequency generator 624. The extracted reference frequency is then used to provide a referencelocal oscillator 722, as reference frequency signal. Thedirectional coupler 718 is connected to the Forward-link User unit 724. Reverse-link User unit 726 is connected toduplex filters 730 and 714. The reference signal and thelocal oscillator unit 722 can alternatively be based on thecontrol link unit 720 oscillator, if theunit 726 is capable of locking to the received signal carrier frequency which has been transmitted bycontrol link unit 628 of theNetwork unit 602. - The
Control Link unit 720 is a radio link between the two,Network unit 602 and theUser unit 702. It may be a proprietary link that operates in one of the unlicensed band of frequencies, or may be a standard wireless link such as 802.11b, 802.11a or Bluetooth, designed to operate in unlicensed band. Thecontrol link unit 720 is connected tomicro-controller unit 728, and is able to communicate through an appropriate interface. Thecontrol link unit 720 is also connected to antennas 708 and 710 for transmission and reception of the control signals. Note that provided that the antenna bandwidth and operating frequency allow, with minor modifications tounit 702,antenna units control link unit 720 operations. -
Micro-controller unit 728 is a simple microprocessor such as ARM7 or ARM9 with all the appropriate memory and interfaces. Themicro-controller unit 728 is controlling the operation of theUser unit 702 and may perform some additional signal conditioning and processing such as signal level averaging and estimation. Some of the task of themicro-controller unit 728 is to set the operating bandwidth and gain of the Forward and Reverselink User units Network unit 602 inFIG. 5 via thecontrol link unit 720. Other tasks of themicro-controller 728 are discussed later by way of an example given inFIGS. 10 and 11 .Micro-controller unit 728 is connected tounits micro-controller unit 720 is not strictly essential since thecontrol unit 626 can perform appropriate tasks in theUser unit 702 via thecontrol link units -
Units local oscillator unit 722, and derive their clock and reference frequencies from thelocal oscillator 722 signal. - Techniques, such as the use of vertical polarization for
antennas units antennas - A simple
user interface unit 721, which can be a keypad or simple dipswitch, is connected tomicro-controller unit 728. - The
User unit 702 has a unique “identity code”, which can be set byuser interface unit 721, which is known to themicro-controller unit 728 and can be communicated to theNetwork unit 602micro-controller unit 626, or any other Network units that may be within the operating range ofUser unit 702. - The
unique Network unit 602 identity code and optionally device location can be transmitted to the cellular network. The information can be used to locate a user in an indoor environment, for example by generating a heavily coded (protected), low bit rate data, containing a long known preamble, the unique identity code and optionally the longitude and the latitude of theNetwork unit 602. The information can then be pulse-shaped for low spectral leakage and superimposed on the reverse-link signal of a given channel by an appropriate modulation scheme, within theNetwork unit 602. The choice of the modulation scheme depends on the operating cellular system. For example, for GSM, which enjoys a constant envelope modulation such as GMSK, amplitude modulation (with low modulation index) can be used. For CDMA systems, with fast reverse-link power control, DBPSK can be used as the modulation scheme. The extraction of the above mentioned information from the received channel signal at base station may involve base station receiver modifications, but does not effect the normal operation of the cellular link. - An example of the above system operation is shown in
FIGS. 7, 8 , 9, 10 and 11.FIGS. 7, 8 and 9 are the system operation flow diagrams for theNetwork unit 602 andFIGS. 10 and 11 are the flow diagrams for theUser unit 702. There are mainly two independent control flow operations that are executed concurrently on themicro-controller 626. The first control-flow is to establish normal operation of the booster, with the second one to monitor the correct operation of the control link between theNetwork unit 602 and theUser unit 702. On “power-up” or “reset” of theNetwork unit 602, theVG amplifier 306 gain is always set to minimum and is switched “OFF”. The system is said to be “operational” whenVG amplifier 306 is switched “ON”, after the correct gain setting by instruction frommicro-controller 626. On “power-up” or “reset” of the Network unit 602 (assuming that the “identity code” of theinterested User unit 702 is known by or pre-entered into theNetwork unit 602 via the user interface unit 627), themicro-controller unit 626 will start the control-flow (step 802) inFIG. 7 . Themicro-controller unit 626 instructs thecontrol link unit 628 to establish link with the User Unit 702 (step 804). Thecontrol link unit 628, using the appropriate protocols, will continue trying to establish a communication link with thecontrol unit 720 of theUser unit 702 until such link is established (step 806). Themicro-controller unit 626 will select the desired U-NII band of operation (step 808) and instruct the calibrationsignal receiver unit 620 to attempt to receive all the possible code offsets (step 8) in the frequency band, ensuring no signal paths from other User units are operational in the geographical area directed to theNetwork unit 602, and facilitating selection of an unused code offset and transmission channel. If an unintended signal path exists between theNetwork unit 602 and other operating User units (step 812), depending on the severity of the coupling path and the strength of the “other units” received calibration signal(s) strength, several different actions can be taken, after a comparison of the received signal SNR with threshold SNR (SNRth) (step 814); -
- 1) If the strength of the received calibration signal(s) from other User units is below the threshold (SNRth), indicating NO interference with the operation of the
Network unit 602 andUser unit 702, an appropriate different code phase is selected, and the micro-controller proceeds as normal. - 2) If the strength of the received calibration signal(s) from other User units is above the threshold (SNRth), indicating interference with the operation of the
Network unit 602 andUser unit 702, theNetwork unit 602 will try to select another U-NII frequency band of operation (step 816), and if more U-NII operating band available, steps 808, 8, and 812 are repeated (step 816). - 3) If the strength of the received calibration signal(s) from other User units is above the threshold (SNRth), indicating interference with the operation of the
Network unit 602 andUser unit 702, and no new clean U-NII operating frequency band can be found, theNetwork unit 602 will issue an appropriate error signal (block 818) and instructUser unit 720 to stop operation (step 9), and theNetwork unit 602 stops operation (step 822).
- 1) If the strength of the received calibration signal(s) from other User units is below the threshold (SNRth), indicating NO interference with the operation of the
- After the successful establishment of the control link between the
Network unit 602 and theUser unit 702, and successful selection of an U-NII operation band, the control flow would be at point “A” inFIG. 7 . Point “A”, shown inFIG. 8 , is the continuation of point “A” inFIG. 7 . With reference toFIG. 8 , after the point “A”, theNetwork unit 602 will select an unused code offset (824), and start the transmission of the calibration signal with the known code offset, at the lowest possible transmit power (step 826). The task is performed by an instruction from themicro-controller 626 to the calibration signal generator andtransmitter unit 622. Themicro-controller 626 will also instruct the calibrationsignal receiver unit 620 to try to receive the calibration signal for the above mentioned code offset, used by the transmitter unit 622 (block 828). TheNetwork unit 602 instructs theUser unit 702, via thecontrol link 628, to commence operation, with the minimum possible transmitter powers for Reverse-link and Forward-link User units transmitter unit 622 has not been reached (step 834), themicro-controller unit 626 will instruct thetransmitter unit 622 to increase the power of the transmitted signal by a predetermined step size, dG, (step 836). The operation continues until a signal is detected at the output of thereceiver 620, or until establishment that no signal can be detected with even the maximum transmit power of thetransmitter unit 622. Then, theNetwork unit 602 is capable of calculating the Up-link System Path Loss, PLu1, and hence the Up-link System Link Gain, Gu1, and accordingly, supplies appropriate transmitter power of the Reverse-link Network unit 606 (step 838). Assuming the Up-link System Path Loss, PLu1, and the Down-link System Path Loss, PLd1, are the same, i.e. PLd1=PLu1, the maximum gain of thetransmitter amplifier 212 of the Forward-link User unit 724 can be calculated (step 838) and forwarded toUser unit 702, via the control link unit 628 (step 840). After the establishment of the system gain, themicro-controller 626, vialink control unit 628, informs theUser unit 702 of thecorrect amplifier 212 gain setting (block 840). After the completion of the system calibration (steps 804 to 840), themicro-controller 626 sets theamplifier 306 at the correct gain for transmission (step 842) and instructs theUser unit 702 to commence operation with the statedamplifier 212 gain setting (block 844). Thecalibration signal receiver 620 continues to receive the signal transmitted by the calibration signal transmitter 622 (step 846). If the safe average signal power level is exceeded for a substantial amount of time (step 848), themicro-controller 626 will instruct theUser unit 702, via thecontrol link unit 628, to stop operation (step 850), and alsoNetwork 602 will stop transmission of signals by the Reverse-link Network unit 606 (step 852), and the system steps 802 to 844 are repeated. If the average signal power level is within the expected range, thecalibration signal receiver 620 is instructed to receive and detect signals with all other possible code offsets (step 856). If no signal with substantial average signal power level is detected, theNetwork unit 602 will return to step 846. If a signal with substantial average signal power level is detected, theNetwork unit 602 will go to step 850. In order to speed up the search and detection of other code offsets, it is also possible to have two (or more) replicas of thecalibration signal receiver 620, such that the “own code” detection can be continuous and uninterrupted, while other receiver replicas can scan for “other code” offsets. - The second control-flow operation starts after
step 806, and is shown inFIG. 9 . The second operation checks the quality and performance of the control links of thecontrol units Network unit 602 are stopped (step 866), and theUser unit 702 is instructed to stop operation (step 868), and finally theNetwork unit 602 will go back to step 802 (step 870). -
FIGS. 10 and 11 are the system operation flow diagram for theUser unit 702. There are mainly two independent control flow operations that are executed concurrently on themicro-controller 728. The first control-flow is to establish normal operation of the booster (FIG. 10 ), with the second one to monitor the correct operation of the control link between theNetwork unit 602 and the User unit 702 (FIG. 11 ). On “power-up” or “reset” of theUser unit 702, theVG amplifier 212 gain is always set to minimum and is switched “OFF”. The system is said to be “operational” whenVG amplifier 212 is switched “ON”, after the correct gain setting by instruction frommicro-controller 728. On “power-up” or “reset” of the User unit 702 (assuming that the “identity code” of theinterested Network unit 602 is known by or pre-entered into theUser unit 702 via the user interface unit 721), themicro-controller 728 will start the control-flow (step 902 inFIG. 10 ). Themicro-controller unit 728 instructs thecontrol link unit 720 to establish link with the Network Unit 602 (step 904). Thecontrol link unit 728, using the appropriate protocols, will continue trying to establish a communication link with thecontrol unit 620 of theNetwork unit 602 until such link is established (step 906). After the successful establishment of the control link between theUser unit 702 and theNetwork unit 602, theUser unit 702 monitors the control channel for instruction from the Network unit 602 (step 908). If a “stop” instruction is issued by the Network unit 602 (step 11), theUser unit 702 will stop the forward-link and reverse-link transmissions (step 912). If the instruction is to set parameters (step 916) such as the “operation bandwidth”, or the “U-NII spectrum channel number”, or “the cellular channel number”, or any or all of the above, and any other system parameters to be set, theUser unit 702 sets the parameters as specified by the instruction (step 918). If the instruction is to “set theamplifier 212 gain” (step 920), theUser unit 702 sets the requested gain for the VG amplifier 212 (step 922). If the instruction is to “commence transmission” (step 923), theUser unit 702 begins operation in the forward 724 and the reverse 726 links of the unit (step 924). Other instructions that are not mentioned in the example may be used. The instructions are executed by theUser unit 702 if the instructions are received by the User unit 702 (step 925 & 926). After instruction execution, theUser unit 702 returns to step 908. - The second control-flow operation starts after
step 906, and is shown inFIG. 11 . The second operation checks the quality and performance of the control links of thecontrol units User unit 702 will go back to step 902 (step 938). - The description is merely an example a system implementation. Other possible methods and solutions may be implemented. Several points may be noted.
-
- 1. The
Network unit 602 can control several User units, such as theUser unit 702. In such setups, the example control flow, shown inFIGS. 7, 8 , 9, 10 and 11 may be modified such that theNetwork Unit 602 can initialize each User unit independently. For stable operation, the Reverse-link Network unit 606amplifier 306 gain is set for the minimum Up-link System Path Loss, PLu1, for operation with all the active User units. Thus, if the Down-link System Path Loss, PLd1, is based on the Up-link System Path Loss, PLu1, calculations (i.e. PLd1≈PLu1), theminimum amplifier 306 gain is used for all the User units in the forward-link under the control of theNetwork unit 602. If the Down-link System Path Loss, PLd1, is NOT based on the Up-link System Path Loss (i.e. a separate calibration loop exists for estimating PLd1), theamplifier 306 gain can be set independently for each User units in the forward-link, under the control of theNetwork unit 602. - 2. Another modification used for a multiple-User unit (several User units 702) operation is that the final Down-link System Path Loss, PLd1, and the Up-link System Path Loss, PLu1, measurements can be performed with all User units under the control of the Network unit 602 (including Network unit 602), active such that aggregate signal power levels do not exceed the desired Down-link System Link Gain, Gd1, or the desired Up-link System Link gain, Gu1. If combined signal from the User Units exceeds the acceptable level for either of the reverse or forward system link gains, the appropriate amplifier gains are reduced in iterative step increments to such level that the maximum allowed system link gain, or the forward and the reverse links are met.
- 3. Additional hardware, similar to the calibration signal generator and
transmitter 622, and thecalibration signal receiver 620, may be included in the forward-link path of either theNetwork unit 602 or theUser unit 702, to assess the Down-link System Path Loss, PLd1, independently (for eachUser unit 702 controlled by Network unit 602). - 4. Although the signal path in both the
Network unit 620 and theUser unit 702, in the forward link, is constantly active, to boost the beacon (BCCH in GSM) transmissions of the base stations, the reverse-link path signal path of theNetwork unit 620 and theUser unit 702 may be active, unless a substantial signal level is detected (i.e. “gated”). Therefore, in theUser unit 702, based on the received signal power level on reverse-link, which can be measured after theLNA unit 320 orfilter unit 321, themicro-controller unit 728 switches thetransmitter unit 316 “OFF” if the signal power level is below the desired threshold, or “ON” if the signal power level is above the desired threshold. Equally, in theNetwork unit 602, based on the received signal power level on reverse-link, which can be measured after thereceiver unit 310 orconverter unit 308, themicro-controller unit 626 switches the variablegain amplifier unit 306 “OFF” if the signal power level is below the desired threshold, or “ON” if the signal power level is above the desired threshold. Care is taken that the reverse-link “gated” operation does not interfere with the calibration signal path and mechanism involving theunits - 5. With certain modifications in the hardware and the control software, the
Network unit 602 and theUser unit 702 can be merged into a single unit, connected “back-to-back”. The design and operation of the back-to-back option is shown inFIG. 14 and discussed later. - 6. The
unique Network unit 602 identity code and optionally device location can be transmitted to the cellular network. The information can be used to locate a user in an indoor environment, for example by generating a heavily coded (protected), low bit rate data, containing a long known preamble, the unique identity code and optionally the longitude and the latitude of theNetwork unit 602. The information can then be pulse-shaped for low spectral leakage and superimposed on the reverse-link signal of a given channel by an appropriate modulation scheme, within theNetwork unit 602. The choice of the modulation scheme depends on the operating cellular system. For example, for GSM, which enjoys a constant envelope modulation such as GMSK, amplitude modulation (with low modulation index) can be used. For CDMA systems, with fast reverse-link power control, DBPSK can be used as the modulation scheme. The extraction of the above mentioned information from the received channel signal at base station may involve base station receiver modifications, but does not effect the normal operation of the cellular link.
- 1. The
- The above discussion is applicable to all the different analogue implementations of all the various disclosed boosters.
-
FIG. 12 shows an example of digital implementation of the Network unit 602 (labeled 1002 inFIG. 12 ), which is placed where good signal coverage exists, indoor or outdoors. Twoantennas Network unit 1002. Also twoantennas Network unit 1002. Although, any diversity-combining scheme such as Maximal Ratio Combining, etc. can be used for the receiver chain, and transmit diversity schemes such as random phase change in one or both antennas for the transmitter chain, a simple scheme that is based on antenna switched diversity with “continuous switching” strategy is suggested here. The continuous switching strategy, with the switching rate selected for optimum performance (e.g. at, or twice the GSM Timeslot rate ˜4.6 msec), can be used for both transmit and receive operations, and will result in a nominal average transmit/receive signal power, provided the antennas are placed sufficiently apart. The continuous-switch diversity scheme can be simply implemented using only a simple RF switch at the antenna ports. Therefore, theRF switch 1008 connected toantennas duplex filter 1010, and the micro-controller 1060, under the control of the micro-controller 1060, will provide switching operations for the cellular transmit/receive operation of theNetwork unit 1002. Also, theRF switch 1032 connected toantennas duplex filter 1034 will provide switching operations for the U-NII band transmit/receive operation of theNetwork unit 1002. Theduplex filter 1010 is connected to forward-link LNA 1012 and thedirectional coupler 1056.LNA 1012 is connected to thefrequency converter unit 1014.Frequency converter 1014 is connected to Automatic Gain Control (AGC)unit 1018. Thefrequency converter 1014 converts the frequency band of the incoming signal from the cellular band to baseband, or “near baseband” frequency band. Thefrequency converter unit 1014 may supply appropriate filtering for the correct operation of the receiver chain. The operating frequency of thefrequency converter unit 1014 is set by micro-controller unit 1060. TheAGC unit 1018 is connected to Analogue to Digital Converter (AD/C)unit 1020 and the Signal Conditioning (SC)unit 1022. TheAGC 1018 is optional, and its task is to place the received signal level substantially close to the middle of the dynamic range of the AD/C 1020. If included, the design and operation of theunit 1018 is configured so that in the presence of low signal power noise within the operating bandwidth does not dominate the operation of theAGC unit 1018. Also care is taken so that the gain contribution of theAGC unit 1018 is compensated in the final Down-link System Link Gain Gd1 calculations or the gain value of theAGC 1018 is compensated in theSC unit 1022. If theAGC unit 1018 is not included, the AD/C unit 1020 has to provide the appropriate dynamic range, which can be as high as 144 dB (24-bits). The AD/C unit 1020 is connected to theSignal Conditioning unit 1022. TheSignal Conditioning unit 1022 performs such tasks as channel select filtering for the desired operating frequency band, frequency conversion, insertion of reference frequency, signal level estimation, AGC algorithm, WLAN transmitter algorithms, and any other features that use signal conditioning and processing. For example, the channel select filters that can be implemented as poly-phased filters can be set for a given operating bandwidth of 1.3, 5, 10 or 15 MHz, operating at any position within the forward-link cellular or PCS or desired frequency spectrum. TheSignal Conditioning unit 1022 clock frequency is derived from a local reference frequency 1070 and provided byclock unit 1024. Depending on the system parameters and the appropriate operational bandwidth and the load of the supported operations, such as filtering, theSignal Conditioning unit 1022 may be implemented by a variety of technologies such as FPGAs, ASICs and general purpose DSPs such as Texas Instruments TMS320C6416-7E3 processor. TheSignal Conditioning unit 1022 may include all appropriate interfaces and memory. TheSignal Conditioning unit 1022 is connected to Digital to Analogue Converter (DA/C)unit 1026. The DA/C unit 1026 may include appropriate post filtering after digital to analogue conversion. The DA/C unit 1026 is connected tofrequency converter unit 1028.Frequency converter unit 1028 up-converts the frequencies of the input signal to the desired portion of U-NII band of frequencies. Thefrequency converter unit 1028 may supply all filtering for the correct operation of the transmitter chain. The operating frequency of thefrequency converter unit 1028 is set by micro-controller unit 1060. Therefore, Dynamic Channel Allocation (DCA) algorithm can be used to select the best operating frequency band. Thefrequency converter unit 1028 is connected to the variablegain amplifier unit 1030. The gain of theamplifier 1030 is set by the micro-controller unit 1060, and in most time is set to maximum allowed power for transmission in U-NII band. The variablegain amplifier unit 1030 is connected toDuplex filter 1034. - The
duplex filter 1034 is connected reverse-link LNA 1040 an theVG amplifier 1030.LNA 1040 is connected to thefrequency converter unit 1042.Frequency converter unit 1042 is connected to thedirectional coupler unit 1041. Thefrequency converter 1042 converts the frequency band of the incoming signal from the U-NII band to baseband, or “near baseband” frequency band. Thefrequency converter unit 1042 includes filtering for the correct operation of the receiver chain. The operating frequency of thefrequency converter unit 1042 is set by micro-controller unit 1060.Directional coupler unit 1041 is connected to Automatic Gain Control (AGC)unit 1044, and the calibration signal receiver unit 1016. TheAGC unit 1044 is connected to Analogue to Digital Converter (AD/C)unit 1046 and theSignal Conditioning unit 1048. TheAGC 1044 is optional, and its task is to place the received signal level substantially close to the middle of the dynamic range of the AD/C 1046. If included, the design and operation of theunit 1044 are configured so that in the presence of low signal power noise within the operating bandwidth does not dominate the operation of theAGC unit 1044. Also care can be taken so that the gain contribution of theAGC unit 1044 is compensated in the final Up-link System Link Gain Gu1 calculations or the gain value of theAGC 1044 is compensated in theSC unit 1048. If theAGC unit 1044 is not included, the AD/C unit 1046 supplies suitable dynamic range, which can be as high as 144 dB (24-bits). The AD/C unit 1046 is connected to theSignal Conditioning unit 1048. TheSignal Conditioning unit 1048 performs such tasks as channel select filtering for the desired operating frequency band, frequency conversion, signal calibration receiver, signal level estimation, AGC algorithm, WLAN receiver algorithms and any other features that use signal conditioning and processing. For example, the channel select filters that can be implemented as poly-phased filters can be set for a given operating bandwidth of 1.3, 5, 10 or 15 MHz, operating at any position within the forward-link U-NII or any desired frequency spectrum. TheSignal Conditioning unit 1048 clock frequency is derived from a local reference frequency 1070 and provided byclock unit 1024. Depending on the system parameters such as appropriate operational bandwidth and the load of the supported operations, such as filtering, theSignal Conditioning unit 1048 may be implemented by a variety of technologies such as FPGAs, ASICs and general purpose DSPs such as Texas Instruments TMS320C6416-7E3 processor. TheSignal Conditioning unit 1048 may include all appropriate interfaces and memory. TheSignal Conditioning unit 1048 is connected to Digital to Analogue Converter (DA/C)unit 1050. The DA/C unit 1050 is connected tofrequency converter unit 1052. The DA/C unit 1050 supplies post filtering subsequent to digital to analogue conversion.Frequency converter unit 1052 up-converts the frequencies of the input signal to the desired portion of cellular or PCS band of frequencies. Thefrequency converter unit 1052 includes filtering for the correct operation of the transmitter chain. The operating frequency of thefrequency converter unit 1052 is set by micro-controller unit 1060. Thefrequency converter unit 1052 is connected to the variablegain amplifier unit 1054. The gain of theamplifier 1054 is set by the micro-controller unit 1060. The variablegain amplifier unit 1054 is connected todirectional coupler 1056. Thedirectional coupler 1056 is connected toDuplex filter 1010. It is also possible to use hybrid combiners instead of thedirectional couplers - A calibration signal generator/
transmitter 1058 is coupled to the reverse-link transmitter path via thedirectional coupler 1056. Theunit 1058 will provide a calibration signal, at desired power levels, which is used to establish the level of the above mentioned Up-link System Path Loss, PLu1, that exists between the Network unit 1002 (502 inFIG. 4 ) and theUser unit 2002 inFIG. 13 (504 inFIG. 4 ). The calibration signal generated byunit 1058 is transmitted via thediversity antennas unit 1058 is a direct-sequence spread spectrum signal modulated by a known Pseudo Random (PN) code with a known code phase (“own code” phase) and with a chipping rate comparable to the forward and reverse links of theNetwork unit 1002 andUser unit 2002 operating bandwidths. The code phases are selected such that the minimum code phase difference is larger than the maximum expected path delay (measured in multiple number of chips) and after that, the other code phases should be multiple integer of the minimum code phase. The calibration signal receiver 1016 which is connected to the reverse-link of theNetwork unit 1002, by using the known PN code and the transmit code phase (“own code” phase), is then capable of detecting and demodulating the calibration signal transmitted byunit 1058, which has entered the reverse-link path via the mentioned closed-loop mechanism that exists between theNetwork unit 1002 and theUser unit 2002 inFIG. 13 (504 inFIG. 4 ). The calibration signal receiver unit 1016 is capable of establishing the received signal strength, which is then used to estimate the Up-link System Path Loss, PLu1, that exists between the Network unit 1002 (502 inFIG. 4 ) and theUser unit 2002 inFIG. 13 (504 inFIG. 4 ). The PN code phase can be assigned uniquely, or drawn according to a random algorithm, such that the probability of two units having the same code phase can be very low. The feature enables the calibration signal receiver 1016 to be able to scan and receive “other code” phases, and hence, establishing if there is any other signal coupling to or from other units that may be operating in the same geographical area. The code can also be modulated with information about the identity of theNetwork unit 1002. The carrier frequency of the transmitted calibration signal may be at the operating cellular frequency band. However, carrier frequencies in other bands, such as ISM band at 2.4 GHz, may be used for the transmission of the calibration signal so that the calibration signal generator andtransmitter 1058 carrier frequency is placed as near as possible to the operating frequency band. The chipping rate and the transmit power of the calibration signal PN code are such that the calibration signal complies with the FCC 47 CFR Part-15 rules. Although the ISM band is not the same as the cellular operating band, nevertheless, the band is sufficiently close to enable the system to establish the antenna coupling and the Up-link and Down-link System Link Gains, (Gu1, Gd1), at the cellular operating band. The instantaneous amplitude and phase values are no longer relevant operating at ISM band. Any antenna and propagation differences in the average signals level between the two ISM and cellular operating bands can be investigated in the design phase and taken into account in the final system design. - The
calibration transmitter unit 1058 and thecalibration receiver unit 1026 baseband functions can be integrated and supported by theSignal Conditioning unit 1048. Thecalibration transmitter unit 1058 and the calibration receiver unit 1016 functions can also be integrated into reverse-link signal path. In the example, the calibration signal generator andtransmitter unit 1058 and the calibration signal receiver 1016 are both in theNetwork unit 1002. However, both or one of the units including calibration signal generator andtransmitter unit 1058, and calibration signal receiver 1016, can also be placed in theUser unit 2002 with certain modifications and considerations. In some cases, a calibration mechanism for the forward-link, similar to the one described for the reverse-link, includes components such as the units, 1056, 1058, 1016 and 1041, which is placed in theUser unit 2002. - The Equipment ID and reference frequency unit 624 shown in
FIG. 5 , in the forward-link path, is now supported by theSignal Conditioning unit 1022 in thedigital Network unit 1002, with the description and function remaining the same as the one discussed for unit 624. - The
control link unit 1062 is a radio link between the twoNetwork 1002 and the User 2002 (inFIG. 13 ) units. It may be a proprietary link that operates in one of the unlicensed band of frequencies, or may be a standard wireless link such as 802.11b, 802.11a, 802.11g or Bluetooth, designed to operate in the unlicensed band. Thecontrol link unit 1062 is connected to micro-controller unit 1060 and is able to communicate through an appropriate interface. Thecontrol link unit 1062 is also connected toantennas unit 1002,antenna units control link unit 1062 operations. With minor modifications tounit 1002, and where the selected operating frequencies allow, the baseband functionality of thecontrol link unit 1062 can be included in theSignal Conditioning units control link unit 1062 signals multiplexed (in frequency or time) with the transmit/receive signals of the forward and the reverse-link Network unit 1002, that are transmitted and received byantennas - Micro-controller unit 1060 is a simple micro-processor such as ARM7 or ARM9 with all the appropriate memory and interfaces. The micro-controller unit 1060 is controlling the operation of the
Network unit 1002 and may perform some additional signal conditioning and processing such as signal level averaging and estimation. Some of the task of the micro-controller unit 1060 is to set the operating bandwidth and gain of the forward and reverselink Network unit 1002 components, communicate with theUser unit 2002 inFIG. 13 via thecontrol link unit 1062, control and communicate with the calibration signal generator andtransmitter 1058 and calibration signal receiver 1016. Other tasks of the micro-controller 1060 are discussed by way of an example given inFIGS. 7, 8 and 9. Micro-controller unit 1060 is connected tounits -
Units - A simple
user interface unit 1061, which can be a keypad or simple dipswitch, is connected to micro-controller unit 1060. -
FIG. 13 shows an example of digital implementation of the User unit 702 (labeled 2002 inFIG. 13 ), which is placed where good signal coverage does not exist, indoor or outdoors. Twoantennas User unit 2002. Also, twoantennas User unit 2002. Although any diversity-combining scheme such as Maximal Ratio Combining, etc. can be used for the receiver chain, and transmit diversity schemes such as random phase change in one or both antennas for the transmitter chain, a simple scheme that is based on antenna switched diversity with “continuous switching” strategy is suggested here. The continuous switching strategy, with the switching rate selected for optimum performance (e.g. at, or twice the GSM Timeslot rate ˜4.6 msec), can be used for both transmit and receive operation, and will result in a nominal average transmit/receive signal power, provided the antennas are placed sufficiently apart. The continuous-switch diversity scheme is simply implemented as a simple RF switch at the antenna ports. Therefore, theRF switch 2032 connected toantennas duplex filter 2030 and the micro-controller 2054, under the control of the micro-controller 2054, will provide switching operations for the cellular transmit/receive operation of theUser unit 2002. Also theRF switch 2008 connected toantennas duplex filter 2010 will provide switching operations for the U-NII band transmit/receive operation of theUser unit 2002. Theduplex filter 2010 is connected to forward-link LNA 2012 andVG amplifier 2052.LNA 2012 is connected to thefrequency converter unit 2014.Frequency converter 2014 is connected to Automatic Gain Control (AGC)unit 2016. Thefrequency converter 2014 converts the frequency band of the incoming signal from the cellular band to baseband, or “near baseband” frequency band. Thefrequency converter unit 2014 includes all appropriate filtering for the correct operation of the receiver chain. The operating frequency of thefrequency converter unit 2014 is set by micro-controller unit 2054. TheAGC unit 2016 is connected to Analogue to Digital Converter (AD/C)unit 2018 and the Signal Conditioning unit 2020. TheAGC 2016 is optional, and its task is to place the received signal level substantially close to the middle of the dynamic range of the AD/C 2018. If included, design and operation of theunit 2016 are arranged so that in the presence of low signal power noise within the operating bandwidth does not dominate the operation of theAGC unit 2016. Also care may be taken so that the gain contribution of theAGC unit 2016 is compensated in the final Down-link System Link Gain Gd1 calculations, or the gain value of theAGC 2016 is compensated in the SC unit 2020. If theAGC unit 2016 is not included, the AD/C unit 2018 supplies a suitable dynamic range, which can be as high as 144 dB (24-bits). The AD/C unit 2018 is connected to the Signal Conditioning unit 2020. The Signal Conditioning unit 2020 is programmed to perform such tasks as channel select filtering for the desired operating frequency band, frequency conversion, extraction of reference frequency, signal level estimation, AGC algorithm, WLAN receiver algorithms and any other features that usesignal conditioning and processing. For example, the channel select filters that can be implemented as poly-phased filters can be set for a given operating bandwidth of 1.3, 5, 10 or 15 MHz, operating at any position within the forward-link cellular or PCS or desired frequency spectrum, and set similar to the same parameters as theNetwork unit 1002. The Signal Conditioning unit 2020 extracts the reference frequency transmitted by theNetwork unit 1002. The DA/C 2021, which is connected to the Signal Conditioning unit 2020 provides the analogue form of thereference frequency 2023. Where theNetwork unit 1002 and theUser unit 2002 use the mains electricity supply for their operations, it is possible to use the 60 Hz (or 50 Hz) mains oscillations, to “lock” the local oscillators of these two units, to a common frequency source. The 60 Hz or 50 Hz mains oscillations are converted, by suitable circuitry, to the desired frequency, for the operation of theNetwork unit 1002 and theUser unit 2002. The Signal Conditioning unit 2020 clock frequency is derived from alocal reference frequency 2023 and provided byclock unit 2022. Depending on the system parameters such as operational bandwidth and load of the supported operations, such as filtering, the Signal Conditioning unit 2020 may be implemented by a variety of technologies such as FPGAs, ASICs and general purpose DSPs such as Texas Instruments TMS320C6416-7E3 processor. The Signal Conditioning unit 2020 includes suitable interfaces and memory. The Signal Conditioning unit 2020 is connected to Digital to Analogue Converter (DA/C)unit 2024. The DA/C unit 2024 is connected tofrequency converter unit 2026. The DA/C unit 2024 includes post filtering that is appropriate after the digital to analogue conversion.Frequency converter unit 2026 up-converts the frequencies of the input signal to the desired portion of cellular (or PCS) band of frequencies. Thefrequency converter unit 2026 includes filtering for correct operation of the transmitter chain. The operating frequency of thefrequency converter unit 2026 is set by micro-controller unit 2054. Thefrequency converter unit 2026 is connected to the variablegain amplifier unit 2028. The gain of theamplifier 2028 is set by the micro-controller unit 2054. The variablegain amplifier unit 2028 is connected toDuplex filter 2030. - The
Duplex filter 2030 is also connected to the reverse-link LNA 2038. LNA 2038 is connected to thefrequency converter unit 2040.Frequency converter 2040 is connected to Automatic Gain Control (AGC)unit 2042. Thefrequency converter 2040 converts the frequency band of the incoming signal from the cellular (or PCS) band to baseband, or “near baseband” frequency band. Thefrequency converter unit 2040 includes filtering for correct operation of the receiver chain. The operating frequency of thefrequency converter unit 2040 is set by micro-controller unit 2054. TheAGC unit 2042 is connected to Analogue to Digital Converter (AD/C)unit 2044 and the Signal Conditioning unit 2046. TheAGC 2042 is optional, and its task is to place the received signal level substantially close to the middle of the dynamic range of the AD/C 2044. If included, design and operation of theunit 2042 are configured so that in the presence of low signal power noise within the operating bandwidth does not dominate the operation of theAGC unit 2042. Also care may be taken so that the gain contribution of theAGC unit 2042 is compensated in the final Up-link System Link Gain, Gu1 calculations, or the gain value of theAGC 2042 is compensated in the SC unit 2046. If theAGC unit 2042 is not included, the AD/C unit 2044 supplies an appropriate dynamic range, which can be as high as 144 dB (24-bits). The AD/C unit 2044 is connected to the Signal Conditioning unit 2046. The Signal Conditioning unit 2046 performs such tasks as channel select filtering for the desired operating frequency band, frequency conversion, signal level estimation, AGC algorithm, WLAN transmitter algorithms and any other features that usesignal conditioning and processing. For example, the channel select filters that can be implemented as poly-phased filters can be set for a given operating bandwidth of 1.3, 5, 10 or 15 MHz, operating at any position within the forward-link U-NII or any desired frequency spectrum and set similar to the same parameters as theNetwork unit 1002. The Signal Conditioning unit 2046 clock frequency is derived from alocal reference frequency 2023 and provided byclock unit 2022. Depending on system parameters such as operational bandwidth and supported operation load, for example filtering, the Signal Conditioning unit 2046 may be implemented by a variety of technologies such as FPGAs, ASICs and general purpose DSPs such as Texas Instruments TMS320C6416-7E3 processor. The Signal Conditioning unit 2046 includes appropriate interfaces and memory. The Signal Conditioning unit 2046 is connected to Digital to Analogue Converter (DA/C)unit 2048. The DA/C unit 2048 is connected tofrequency converter unit 2050. The DA/C unit 2048 includes post filtering that is appropriate the digital to analogue conversion.Frequency converter unit 2050 up converts the frequencies of the input signal to the desired portion of U-NII band of frequencies. Thefrequency converter unit 2050 includes appropriate filtering for the correct operation of the transmitter chain. The operating frequency of thefrequency converter unit 2050 is set by micro-controller unit 2054, and therefore Dynamic Channel Allocation (DCA) algorithm can be used to select the best operating frequency band. Thefrequency converter unit 2050 is connected to the variablegain amplifier unit 2052. The gain of theamplifier 2052 is set by the micro-controller unit 2054 and in most time is set to maximum allowed power for transmission in U-NII band. The variablegain amplifier unit 2052 is connected toDuplex filter 2010. - The
Control Link unit 2056 is a radio link between theNetwork unit 1002 and theUser unit 2002. It may be a proprietary link that operates in one of the unlicensed band of frequencies, or may be a standard wireless link such as 802.11b, 802.11a or Bluetooth, designed to operate in unlicensed band. Thecontrol link unit 2056 is connected to micro-controller unit 2054 and is able to communicate through an appropriate interface. Thecontrol link unit 2056 is also connected toantenna 2058 and 2060 for transmission and reception of the control signals. Note that provided that the antenna bandwidth and operating frequency allow, with minor modifications tounit 2002,antenna units control link unit 2056 operations. Also, with minor modifications tounit 2002, and where the selected operating frequencies allow, the baseband functionality of thecontrol link unit 2056 can be included in the Signal Conditioning units 2046 and 2020 respectively, with the transmit/receivecontrol link unit 2056 signals multiplexed (in frequency or time) with the transmit/receive signals of the forward and reverseUser unit 2002, that are transmitted and received byantennas - Micro-controller unit 2054 is a simple micro-processor such as ARM7 or ARM9 with all the appropriate memory and interfaces. The micro-controller unit 2054 is controlling the operation of the
Network unit 2002 and may perform some additional signal conditioning and processing such as signal level averaging and estimation. Some of the task of the micro-controller unit 2054 is to set the operating bandwidth and gain of the forward and reverse link network components, and to communicate with theNetwork unit 1002 inFIG. 12 via thecontrol link unit 2056. Other tasks of the micro-controller 2054 are discussed by way of an example given inFIGS. 10 and 11 . Micro-controller unit 2054 is connected tounits - A simple
user interface unit 2055, which can be a keypad or simple dipswitch, is connected to micro-controller unit 2054. -
Units local oscillator unit 2023, or derive their clock and reference frequencies from thelocal oscillator 2023 signal. - Considering only the reverse-link operation of the
Network unit 1002 and theUser unit 2002, as an example, the signals received throughantenna units antenna units antenna units 2034 and 2036 (and have been termed above as the “Up-link Returned-Signal”), causing a signal return path in the system that may cause instability in the operation of the booster. In the digital implementation of theNetwork unit 1002 and theUser unit 2002, it may be possible to reduce the magnitude of the returned signal (Up-link Returned-Signal) by various signal-processing techniques. The choice, design and effectiveness of the illustrative techniques depend on the system parameters and operating conditions. Most known multipath mitigation algorithms can also be applied for return signal reduction, however, due to the extremely small propagation delays between theNetwork unit 1002 and theUser unit 2002, and the limited temporal resolution of the system, the above conventional algorithms may be practically hard and expensive to implement, at best, or ineffective and detrimental, at worst. Therefore, an example of a filtering technique is supplied, for example in the “Channel Filtering” section, where a “deliberate” delay in the re-transmission of the received signal is used, to separate the returned signal (Up-link Returned-Signal), from the original incident signal, at the output of theantenna unit Signal Conditioning unit 1048, provided that there is a digital data buffer of sufficient size available. The Channel Filtering operation can also be performed by the Signal Conditioning unit 1048 (or SC unit 2046), or can be performed by a separate ASIC or FPGA, connected to the AD/C unit 1046, and theSignal Conditioning unit 1024. Alternatively, with minor modifications, the ASIC or the FPGA units can be placed in theUser unit 2002, connected to the AD/C unit 2042 and Signal Conditioning unit 2046. The calibration signal can be used for channel estimation purposes, so that the amplitude and the phase of the overall channel response (including the return path) can be estimated, for the setting of the Channel Filter taps. The introduction of Channel Filter in the signal path also has an impact on the operation of the antenna diversity scheme. Channel estimation is performed so that antenna switching operations are synchronized so that, out of possible four channels, only two possible propagation channels exist. Since the antenna switching (selection) is under the control of micro-controller unit 1060 in theNetwork unit 1002, and micro-controller 2054 in theUser unit 2002, channel estimation can be performed for both propagation paths, and two sets of Channel Filter coefficients can be determined for filtering operation. Therefore, it is possible to select (or switch to) the relevant filter coefficients, synchronized and in harmony with the antenna selection operation. The Channel Filtering mechanism is not used to totally mitigate the returned signal but is rather used to suppress the signal sufficiently so that some system gain is possible for the signal boosting operation. The introduction of the “deliberate delay” may also be used in conjunction with any other known signal-processing algorithm. - The above discussion is also relevant to the forward-link of the
Network unit 1002 and theUser unit 2002, and therefore the above “delay” and “Channel Filtering”, with the aid of the forward-link calibration signal (not included in theFIGS. 12 and 13 ) is performed in the forward-link of the Network unit 1002 (or User unit 2002). - Other techniques, such as the use of vertical polarization for
antenna units antennas - The control-flow description given for
FIGS. 7, 8 , 9, 10 and 11, with minor modifications, can also be used for the digital implementation of theNetwork unit 1002 andUser unit 2002, which is discussed above inFIGS. 12 and 13 . - The illustrative description is only an example of how the system may be implemented, and is not the only possible method and solution. Several points are noted, as follows:
-
- 1. The
Network unit 1002 may control several User units, such as theUser unit 2002. In such setups, the example control flow, shown inFIGS. 7, 8 , 9, 10 and 11 may be modified such that theNetwork Unit 1002 can initialize each User unit independently. For stable operation, the reverse-link Network unit 1002 variablegain amplifier unit 1054 gain is set for minimum Up-link System Path Loss, PLu1, for operation with all the active User units. Thus, if the Down-link System Path Loss, PLd1, is based on the Up-link System Path Loss, PLu1, calculations (i.e. PLd1≈PLu1), the minimum variablegain amplifier unit 2028 gain is used for all the User units in the forward-link under the control of theNetwork unit 1002. - 2. Another modification for multiple User unit (several User units 2002) operation is that the final Down-link System Path Loss, PLd1, and the Up-link System Path Loss, PLu1, measurements should be carried out with all User units, under the control of the Network unit 1002 (including
Network unit 1002 itself), active such that aggregate signal power levels do not exceed the desired Down-link System Link Gain, Gd1, or the desired Up-link System Link gain, Gu1. If combined signal from the User Units exceeds the acceptable level for either of the reverse or forward system link gains, the appropriate amplifier gains are reduced in iterative step increments to such level that the maximum allowed system link gain, or the forward and the reverse links are met. - 3. Additional hardware may be included, similar to the calibration signal generator and
transmitter 1058, and the calibration signal receiver 1016 in the forward-link path of either theNetwork unit 1002 or in theUser unit 2002 to assess the Down-link System Path Loss, PLd1, independently (for eachUser unit 2002 controlled by Network unit 1002). - 4. Although the signal path in both the
Network unit 1002 and theUser unit 2002, in the forward link, is constantly active, to boost the beacon (BCCH in GSM) transmissions of the base stations, the reverse-link path signal path of theNetwork unit 1002 and theUser unit 2002 may be inactive, unless a substantial signal level is detected (i.e. “gated”). Therefore, in theUser unit 2002, based on the received signal power level on reverse-link, which can be measured after the LNA unit 2038 or in Signal Conditioning unit 2046, the micro-controller unit 2054 switches theVG amplifier unit 2052 “OFF” and if the signal power level is below the desired threshold, or “ON” if the signal power level is above the desired threshold. Equally, in theNetwork unit 1002, based on the received signal power level on reverse-link, which can be measured after theLNA unit 1040 or inSignal Conditioning unit 1048, the micro-controller unit 1060 switches theVG amplifier unit 1054 “OFF” and if the signal power level is below the desired threshold, or “ON” if the signal power level is above the desired threshold. Care is taken that the reverse-link “gated” operation does not interfere with the calibration signal path and mechanism involving theunits - 5. With certain modifications in the hardware and the control software, it is possible to merge the
Network unit 1002 and theUser unit 2002 into a single unit, connected “back-to-back”. The design and operation of the back-to-back option is shown inFIG. 15 and discussed later. - 6. It is also possible to transmit the
unique Network unit 1002 identity code, and optionally device location, to the cellular network. The information can be used to locate a user in an indoor environment, for example by generating a heavily coded (protected), low bit rate data, containing a long known preamble, the unique identity code and optionally the longitude and the latitude of theNetwork unit 1002. The information can then be pulse-shaped for low spectral leakage and superimposed on the reverse-link signal of a given channel by an appropriate modulation scheme, within theNetwork unit 1002. The choice of the modulation scheme depends on the operating cellular system. For example, for GSM, which enjoys a constant envelope modulation such as GMSK, amplitude modulation (with low modulation index) can be used. For CDMA systems, with fast reverse-link power control, DBPSK can be used as the modulation scheme. Extraction of information from the received channel signal at base station may be improved by base station receiver modifications, but does not affect normal operation of the cellular link.
- 1. The
- The noted points are applicable to many different digital booster implementations.
- In a Back-to-Back arrangement, transmission and reception in U-NII band and the control link that exists between the
Network unit 602 and theUser unit 702 is superfluous. FIG. 14 depicts an analogue implementation example of such an arrangement, where the booster is placed where good signal coverage exists, indoor or outdoors. The back-to-back unit 2252 consists ofantennas Antennas RF switch 2258, where antenna switched diversity operation for transmit and receive operation is provided as discussed forNetwork unit 602 andUser unit 702. In the forward-link, theRF switch unit 2258 is connected to theduplex filter unit 2260. Theduplex filter unit 2260 is connected to the LNA 2288 in the Forward-link unit 2264. The LNA 2288 is connected to thefilter unit 2286. Thebandpass filter unit 2286 can be designed to pass all or a desired part of the interested cellular spectrum, or can be a bank of overlapping bandpass filters, covering the full spectrum of the interested cellular system, with a RF switch, such that the desired band and bandwidth, can be selected.Filter unit 2286 is connected to the variable gain amplifier 2284. The gain of the VG amplifier unit 2284 is set bymicro-controller unit 2270. The variable gain amplifier unit 2284 is connected to theduplex filter 2276. Theduplex filter 2276 is connected toRF switch 2278. Theantennas RF switch 2278. On the reverse-link, theRF switch unit 2278 is connected to theduplex filter 2276. Theduplex filter unit 2276 is connected todirectional coupler unit 2274. Thedirectional coupler unit 2274 is connected tocalibration signal receiver 2272 and LNA 2290 in the Reverse-link unit 2266. The calibrationsignal receiver unit 2272 which is coupled to the reverse-link receive path of thebooster unit 2252, bydirectional coupler 2272, using the known PN code and the transmit code phase is then capable of detecting and demodulating the calibration signal transmitted byunit 2268, which has entered the reverse-link path via the mentioned closed-loop mechanism that exists between theantenna units antenna units signal receiver unit 2272 is capable of establishing the received signal strength, which is then used to estimate the Up-link System Path Loss, PLi1. The LNA 2290 is connected to filterunit 2292, which is connected to variablegain amplifier unit 2294. Thebandpass filter 2292 can be designed to pass all or a desired part of the interested cellular spectrum, or can be a bank of overlapping bandpass filters, covering the full spectrum of the interested cellular system, with a RF switch, such that the desired band and bandwidth can be selected. The gain of theVG amplifier unit 2294 is set bymicro-controller unit 2270. Thevariable amplifier 2294 is connected todirectional coupler unit 2262.Directional coupler unit 2262 is connected to the calibration signal generator andtransmitter unit 2268, andduplex filter 2260. Themicro-controller 2270 is connected to calibration signal generator andtransmitter unit 2268, thecalibration signal receiver 2272, the Reverse-link unit 2266 and Forward-link unit 2264. A simpleuser interface unit 2271, which can be a keypad or simple dipswitch, is connected tomicro-controller unit 2270. - Although many functional units of the
Network unit 602 and theUser unit 702 can be eliminated in the back-to-back unit 2252, operation and the remaining units of the booster remain fundamentally the same as the one described for theNetwork unit 602 andUser unit 702. Calibration signal transmission and reception are shown just for the Reverse-link. However, the same mechanism can be placed for the forward-link if desired, which also results in better system performance. Since theantenna units - The
unique unit 2252 identity code and optionally device location can be transmitted to the cellular network. The information can be used to locate a user in an indoor environment, for example by generating a heavily-coded (protected), low bit rate data, containing a long known preamble, the unique identity code and optionally the longitude and the latitude of theunit 2252. The information can then be pulse-shaped for low spectral leakage and superimposed on the reverse-link signal of a given channel by an appropriate modulation scheme, within theunit 2252. Choice of the modulation scheme depends on the operating cellular system. For example, for GSM, which enjoys a constant envelope modulation such as GMSK, amplitude modulation (with low modulation index) can be used. For CDMA systems, with fast reverse-link power control, DBPSK can be used as the modulation scheme. Extraction of the illustrative information from the received channel signal at base station may involve base station receiver modifications, but does not effect normal operation of the cellular link. -
FIG. 15 depicts a digital implementation example of Back-to-Back arrangement, where the booster is placed where good signal coverage exists, indoor or outdoors. The back-to-back unit 2302 consists ofantennas Antennas RF switch 2308, where antenna switched diversity operation for transmit and receive operations is provided as discussed forNetwork unit 1002 andUser unit 2002. In the forward-link, theRF switch unit 2308 is connected to the duplex filter unit 2310. TheRF switch unit 2308 is also connected tomicro-controller 2350. The duplex filter unit 2310 is connected to theLNA 2312. Thedirectional coupler unit 2311 is connected to output of theLNA 2312, and thecalibration receiver unit 2305. Thecalibration receiver 2305 is also connected tomicro-controller 2350. Thedirectional coupler unit 2311 is also connected to thefrequency converter unit 2313.Frequency converter 2313 is connected to Automatic Gain Control (AGC)unit 2314. Thefrequency converter 2313 converts the frequency band of the incoming signal from the cellular band to baseband, or “near baseband” frequency band. Thefrequency converter unit 2313 includes filtering for the correct operation of the receiver chain. The operating frequency of thefrequency converter unit 2313 is set bymicro-controller unit 2350. TheAGC unit 2314 is connected to Analogue-to-Digital Converter (AD/C)unit 2316. TheAGC 2314 is optional, and its task is to place the received signal level substantially close to the middle of the dynamic range of the AD/C 2316. If included, design and operation ofunit 2314 are configured so that in the presence of low signal power, noise within the operating bandwidth does not dominate the operation of theAGC unit 2314. Also care is taken so that the gain contribution of theAGC unit 2314 is compensated in the final Down-link System Link Gain, Gd1 calculations, or alternatively the gain value of theAGC 2314 is compensated in theSC unit 2318. If theAGC unit 2314 is not included, the AD/C unit 2316 supports a suitable dynamic range, which can be as high as 144 dB (24-bits). The AD/C unit 2316 is connected toSignal Conditioning unit 2318. TheSignal Conditioning unit 2318 performs such tasks as channel select filtering for the desired operating frequency band, frequency conversion, signal level estimation, AGC algorithm, and any other features that usesignal conditioning and processing. For example, the channel select filters that can be implemented as poly-phased filters can be set for a given operating bandwidth of 1.3, 5, 10 or 15 MHz, operating at any position within the forward-link cellular or PCS or desired frequency spectrum. Depending on the system parameters such as operational bandwidth and supported operation load, for example filtering, theSignal Conditioning unit 2318 may be implemented by a variety of technologies such as FPGAs, ASICs and general purpose DSPs such as Texas Instruments TMS320C6416-7E3 processor. TheSignal Conditioning unit 2318 includes appropriate interfaces and memory. TheSignal Conditioning unit 2318 is connected to Digital-to-Analogue Converter (DA/C)unit 2320. The DA/C unit 2320 includes post filtering that is appropriate the digital to analogue conversion. The DA/C unit 2320 is connected tofrequency converter unit 2321.Frequency converter unit 2321 up-converts the frequencies of the input signal to the original band of cellular frequencies. Thefrequency converter unit 2321 includes appropriate filtering for the correct operation of the transmitter chain. The operating frequency of thefrequency converter unit 2321 is set bymicro-controller unit 2350. Thefrequency converter unit 2321 is connected to the variable gain amplifier unit 2322, which is connected to thedirectional coupler unit 2325. The gain of the VG amplifier unit 2322 is set bymicro-controller unit 2350. Thedirectional coupler unit 2325 is connected to the calibration signal generator andtransmitter unit 2323 and the duplex filter 2324. The calibration signal generator andtransmitter unit 2323 is also connected to themicro-controller 2350. The duplex filter 2324 is connected toRF switch 2326. Theantennas RF switch 2326. - On the reverse-link, the
RF switch unit 2326 is connected to the duplex filter 2324. TheRF switch unit 2326 is also connected tomicro-controller 2350. The duplex filter unit 2324 is connected toLNA unit 2332. TheLNA unit 2332 is connected to thedirectional coupler unit 2334. Thedirectional coupler unit 2334 is connected to thefrequency converter unit 2335.Frequency converter 2335 is connected to Automatic Gain Control (AGC)unit 2336. Thefrequency converter 2335 converts the frequency band of the incoming signal from the cellular band to baseband, or “near baseband” frequency band. Thefrequency converter unit 2335 includes filtering for the correct operation of the receiver chain. The operating frequency of thefrequency converter unit 2335 is set bymicro-controller unit 2350. Thedirectional coupler unit 2334 is also connected to calibrationsignal receiver unit 2348. Thefrequency converter unit 2335 is connected toAGC unit 2336. TheAGC unit 2336 is connected to Analogue-to-Digital Converter (AD/C) unit 2338. TheAGC 2336 is optional, and its task is to place the received signal level substantially close to the middle of the dynamic range of the AD/C 2338. If included, design and operation of theunit 2336 are configured so that in the presence of low signal power, noise within the operating bandwidth does not dominate the operation of theAGC unit 2336. Also care is taken so that the gain contribution of theAGC unit 2336 is compensated in the final Up-link System Link Gain, Gu1 calculations, or alternatively the gain value of theAGC 2336 is compensated in theSC unit 2340. If theAGC unit 2336 is not included, the AD/C unit 2338 supports a suitable dynamic range, which can be as high as 144 dB (24-bits). The AD/C unit 2338 is connected toSignal Conditioning unit 2340. TheSignal Conditioning unit 2340 performs such tasks as channel select filtering for the desired operating frequency band, frequency conversion, signal level estimation, AGC algorithm, and any other features that usesignal conditioning and processing. For example, the channel select filters that can be implemented as poly-phased filters can be set for a given operating bandwidth of 1.3, 5, 10 or 15 MHz, operating at any position within the forward-link cellular or PCS or desired frequency spectrum. Depending on the system parameters such as operational bandwidth and the load of the supported operations, such as filtering, theSignal Conditioning unit 2340 may be implemented by a variety of technologies such as FPGAs, ASICs and general purpose DSPs such as Texas Instruments TMS320C6416-7E3 processor. TheSignal Conditioning unit 2340 includes appropriate interfaces and memory. TheSignal Conditioning unit 2340 is connected to Digital-to-Analogue Converter (DA/C) unit 2342. The DA/C unit 2342 includes post filtering that is appropriate the digital to analogue conversion. The DA/C unit 2342 is connected to theFrequency converter unit 2343, which up-converts the frequencies of the input signal to the desired portion of cellular or PCS band of frequencies. Thefrequency converter unit 2343 includes filtering for the correct operation of the transmitter chain. The operating frequency of thefrequency converter unit 2343 is set bymicro-controller unit 2350. Thefrequency converter unit 2343 is connected to the variablegain amplifier unit 2344, which is connected to thedirectional coupler unit 2346. The gain of theVG amplifier unit 2344 is set bymicro-controller unit 2350. Thedirectional coupler unit 2346 is connected to the duplex filter 2310. The duplex filter 2310 is connected toRF switch 2308. Theantennas RF switch 2308. A simpleuser interface unit 2351, which can be a keypad or simple dipswitch, is connected tomicro-controller unit 2350.Units local oscillator unit 2356, or derive their clock or reference frequencies from thelocal oscillator 2356. TheSignal Conditioning units local reference frequency 2356 provided byclock unit 2353. - Although, many functional units of the
Network 1002 and theUser 2002 units can be omitted in the back-to-back unit 2302, the operation and the function of the most of the units of thebooster 2302 remain fundamentally the same as the one described for theNetwork unit 1002 andUser unit 2002. As before, the calibration signal transmission and reception are shown just for the reverse-link. In the digital implementation ofbooster unit 2302, the functional blocks for calibration signal generator andtransmitter unit 2352, and thecalibration receiver unit 2348 can be included in theSignal Conditioning unit 2340 for the uplink, and in theSignal Conditioning unit 2318 for the downlink operation. Since theantenna units - Considering only the reverse-link operation of the booster 2303, as an example, the signals received through
antenna units antenna units antenna units 2330 and 2328 (and have been termed above as the “Up-link Returned-Signal”), causing a signal return path in the system that may cause instability in the operation of the booster. In the digital implementation of thebooster unit 2302, it may be possible to reduce the magnitude of the returned signal (Up-link Returned-Signal) by various signal-processing techniques. The choice, design and effectiveness of a technique depends on system parameters and operating conditions. Most known multi-path mitigation algorithms can also be applied for return signal reduction, however, due to the extremely small propagation delays between theantenna units antenna units antenna unit Signal Conditioning unit 2340, provided that there is a digital data buffer of sufficient size available. The Channel Filtering operation can also be performed by theSignal Conditioning unit 2340, or can be performed by a separate ASIC or FPGA, connected to the AD/C unit 2338, and theSignal Conditioning unit 2340. The calibration signal can be used for channel estimation purposes, so that the amplitude and the phase of the overall channel response (including the return path) can be estimated, for the setting of the Channel Filter taps. The introduction of Channel Filter in the signal path also has an impact on the operation of the antenna diversity scheme. Because channel estimation is performed, antenna switching operations are synchronized so that, out of possible four, only two possible propagation channels exist. Since the antenna switching (selection) is under the control ofmicro-controller unit 2350, channel estimation can be performed for both propagation paths, and two sets of Channel Filter coefficients can be determined for filtering operation. Therefore, it is possible to select (or switch to) the relevant filter coefficients, synchronized and in harmony with the antenna selection operation. The Channel Filtering mechanism is not used to totally mitigate the returned signal but rather to suppress the signal sufficiently so that some system gain is possible for the signal boosting operation. Introduction of the “deliberate delay” may also be used in conjunction with any other known signal-processing algorithm. - The above discussion is also relevant to the forward-link of the
booster unit 2302, and therefore the above “delay” and “Channel Filtering” are performed in the forward-link as well. - Other techniques, such as the use of vertical polarization for
antenna units antennas - It is also possible to transmit the
unique unit 2302 identity code, and optionally device location, to the cellular network. The information can be used to locate a user in an indoor environment, for example by generating a heavily coded (protected), low bit rate data, containing a long known preamble, the unique identity code and optionally the longitude and the latitude of theunit 2302. The information can then be pulse-shaped for low spectral leakage and superimposed on the reverse-link signal of a given channel by an appropriate modulation scheme, within theunit 2302. The choice of the modulation scheme depends on the operating cellular system. For example, for GSM, which enjoys a constant envelope modulation such as GMSK, amplitude modulation (with low modulation index) can be used. For CDMA systems, with fast reverse-link power control, DBPSK can be used as the modulation scheme. Extraction of information from the received channel signal at base station may involve base station receiver modifications, but does not effect the normal operation of the cellular link. - An example of the system operational flow diagrams is shown in the
FIG. 16 . With reference toFIGS. 15 and 16 , on “power-up” or “reset” of the booster unit 2303, theVG amplifiers 2322 and 2344 gain are always set to minimum and are switched “OFF”. The system is said to be “operational” whenVG amplifiers 2322 and 2344 are switched “ON”, after the correct gain setting by instruction frommicro-controller 2350. Also, on “power-up” or “reset” action, the operation starts (step 2402), with themicro-controller 2350 instructs the reverse-link calibration receiver 2348 to scan for all possible code offsets (step 2404). If a substantial signal power transmitted by other units, operating within the same geographical area, is detected by the receiver unit 2348 (step 2406), the received signal powers are stored (step 2408). If no substantial signal is detected (step 2410), themicro-controller 2350 instructing the forward-link calibration receiver 2305 to scan for all possible code offsets (step 2410). If a substantial signal power transmitted by other units, operating within the same geographical area, is detected by the receiver unit 2305 (step 2416), the received signal powers are stored (step 2414). After the test for all possible code offsets is finished for the forward and reverse links of the system, and if other units signal power detected (step 2417), the received signals for each offset are tested and the largest signal power is selected (step 2412). If the selected signal power is above a safe threshold (step 2418), theunit 2302 displays an error message (step 2419) and stops operation (step 2422). If the selected signal power is below the safe threshold, the unit proceeds to step 2420. If no substantial signal is detected or the detected signals are below the safe threshold (step 2416), themicro-controller 2350 selects an unused code offset (step 2420) and instructs both the forward and reverse link calibration signal generator andtransmitter units micro-controller 2350 also instructs the forward and reversecalibration receivers calibration receivers micro-controller 2350 calculates the Up-link and Down-link system gains, Gu1 and Gd1, and the subsequent variable amplifier gains for the forward and reverse links (step 2426).Micro controller 2350 sets the gains of the forward and reverse link variable gain amplifier units 2322 & 2346 to the calculated levels, which so far have been at a minimum and “OFF” (step 2428). The system commences full operation (step 2430), with the variable gain amplifier units 2322 & 2346 switched “ON”. - The example provided here can be applied to the booster system described here to combat the effect of mentioned feed-back loop and the above mentioned Up-link Returned-Signal that may exist in the reverse-link of the system and Down-link Returned-Signal that may exist in the forward-link of the system. The “Channel Filtering” technique, discussed here, for the forward and the reverse links is autonomous and can either be applied to both or just one of the forward or the reverse links of the system, and can be implemented in the
Network unit 1002 or theUser unit 2002, or both. To explain the working of Channel filtering, a simplified block diagram of the booster is shown inFIG. 17 , and only the reverse-link operation is discussed for theNetwork unit 1002 and User unit 2002 (the Channel Filtering discussed here is applicable to all digital implementations). In the representation, no antenna diversity is assumed for either the Network unit 2452 (which is substantially similar to 1002 inFIG. 12 ) or the User unit 2454 (which is substantially similar to 2002 inFIG. 13 ). The processing and propagation delays within the booster system can be categorized as the following: -
- τUs=the User unit 2454 processing delay (relatively negligible).
- τP1=the unlicensed band propagation delay.
- τNrx=the
Network unit 2452 receiver processing delay (relatively negligible). - τNtx=the
Network unit 2452 transmitter processing delay (relatively negligible). - τd=the “deliberate” delay introduced in the transmission path of the
Network unit 2452. - τP2=the licensed band propagation delay of the Up-link Returned-Signal.
- The overall impulse response of the
booster unit 2451 is shown in 2464. The original incident pulse, entering from antenna 2462 (A1), arrives at the input to theNetwork unit 2452 receiver after a delay of τf, (the pulse is marked as 2468), where:
τf=τUs+τP1≅τP1 - The pulse is amplified and transmitted 2470, after the “deliberate” time delay τd, from antenna 2456 (marked A4 in
FIG. 17 ). The transmitted signal re-enters the antenna 2462 (A1) after the propagation delay τP2, and arrives at the input to theNetwork unit 2452 receiver after a delay of τf (marked as 2472). So the overall delay for the Up-link Returned-Signal at the input to theNetwork unit 2452 receiver can be stated as τt and is substantially equal to:
τt=τNrx+τd+τNtx+τP2+τf≅τd+τP1+τP2 - The returned
pulse 2472 is delayed by the propagation path delays τP1 and τP2, which can be very small in the booster's operating environment. The “deliberate” delay is introduced to sufficiently separate the Up-link Returned-Signal from the original incident pulse, such that filter coefficients can be estimated easily, and filtering can be performed more effectively. Introduction of another “deliberate” delay in the transmit path of the User unit 2454 ensures separation of the boosted transmitted pulse and the Up-link Returned-Signal, a condition that may be desirable to reduce the effect of the multipath experienced by the boosted transmitted pulse on the operation of the Channel filtering. - In the example here, the “Channel Filtering” unit 2512 (in
FIG. 18 ) is placed only on the reverse-link of theNetwork unit 1002. The channel filtering process involves estimating the complex propagation channel impulse response, including amplitude and phase for all time delays, up to the maximum expected multipath delay. The complex channel impulse response, C(t,τ), can be provided by the calibration signal receiver unit 1016 shown inFIG. 12 , as the information is readily available at the output of the unit, for the reverse-link path of the system. Note that based on the described design of the calibration signal mechanism shown inFIG. 12 (alsoFIG. 15 ), the channel impulse response, provided by the calibration signal receiver unit 1016, will not include the delay contributions of the “deliberate” delay (τd), and the τNrx+τNtx components. While τNrx+τNtx is sufficiently small to ignore, the “deliberate” delay (τd) is added in the overall impulse response, in theNetwork unit 1002, for the estimation of the Channel Filter coefficients. Similarly, if Channel Filtering operation is also used for the forward-link, a separate complex channel impulse response is used for the link. As a result, a similar calibration technique to the reverse-link is performed on the forward-link. An example of the estimated power of the channel impulse response, C(tτ), 2510, at the output of the calibration signal receiver 1016 is shown inFIG. 18 . Theimpulse response 2510 is for a maximum delay of 1 usec, assuming a calibration signal PN code chipping rate of 5 Mchips/sec and 2 samples per chip. InFIG. 18 , C(t,τ) 2510 has three substantial distinguishable propagation paths at delays of 0.2 (P 1), 0.4 (P2) and 1.0 (P3) usec respectively. The maximum expected time delay corresponds to a signal path of about 300 meters, which is reasonable for the booster range and operational environment. The 1.0 usec maximum time delay, together with a “deliberate delay of 1 usec (τd=1 usec), may be implemented using a 21-tap complex FIR filter, with half-chip tap spacing, for Channel Filtering operation.FIG. 18 shows theChannel Filter unit 2512. TheChannel Filter unit 2512 has a 21-tap FIR filter 2506, with tap delay of D=0.1 usec spacing, and with the variable complex coefficients set to the values shown in table 2508. TheFIR filter 2506 output is connected to one of the inputs of the adder unit 2504, and the input of theFIR filter unit 2506 is connected to the output of the adder unit 2504. The other input of the adder unit 2504 is connected to the AD/C 2502. In the example, the AD/C is theunit 1046 inFIG. 12 . TheFIR filter 2506 will produce a replica of the received signal, at the desired time delay with the respective complex coefficient specifying the magnitudes and the phases of the received Up-link Returned-Signal, to “wipe off” the incoming first (P1), second (P2) and third (P3) return signal components. TheFIR filter 2506 can either be implemented by a FPGA, ASIC or by theSignal Conditioning unit 1048 inFIG. 12 . The processes of channel estimation, C(t,τ), and hence up-dating theFIR filter 2506 filter coefficients, are performed continuously, with an update rate that depends on the channel coherence time. For the example, a value of 100 msec can be assumed, as the indoor channels exhibit large coherence time. Alternatively, it is possible to use an adaptive algorithm such as Normalized LMS (NLMS), or RLS, converging on the received calibration signal at theNetwork unit 1002, to estimate the filter coefficients, on an on-going basis. -
FIG. 30 shows an example of analogue implementation of theNetwork unit 600 using a transmission cable as the physical medium for communication with the User unit 20 (702 inFIG. 6 ). TheNetwork unit 602 shown inFIG. 5 is modified to theunit 3005 shown inFIG. 30 to transmit to, and receive signals from, the User unit 4005 (FIG. 20 ), which is modified version of theUser unit 702 shown inFIG. 6 , over a cable capable of supporting the operating bandwidth and the frequencies of theNetwork unit 3005 andUser unit 4005 signals. Thecable interface unit 3020 consists of aline interface unit 3160 which is connected to the transmission/reception cable 3170 and twohybrid combiners 3140 and 3150 on the forward-link and 3150 on the reverse link of theNetwork sub unit 3010. Theline interface unit 3160 will provide the means for the load matching for connection to atransmission line 3170, and other appropriate components such as the amplifiers, modulation and frequency converters (modem functionalities), for reliable transmission over thetransmission line 3170. The design of theline interface unit 3160 is dependent on thetransmission line 3170 characteristics, and is well known in the art. For example, even the in-building power lines or telephone lines can be used as the transmission line 3170 (as in homePNA), where theline interface unit 3160 is designed for such operation. The hybrid combiner (or directional coupler) 3140 is used to combine the control link 3110 signal with the forward-link signal. Alternatively, the outputs of thedirectional coupler unit 3040 and the control link unit 3110 can directly be connected toline interface unit 3160, where they are modulated on adjacent carriers for simultaneous transmission to theUser unit 4005. The hybrid combiner (or directional coupler) 3150 is used to extract sufficient signal for reception and detection of control link 3110 received signal. Alternatively, the inputs to thedirectional coupler unit 3130 and the control link unit 3110 can directly be connected toline interface unit 3160, if the control and data signals are modulated on adjacent carriers for simultaneous transmission from theUser unit 4005. It is also possible to use hybrid combiners instead of thedirectional couplers link Network unit 3060 receiver internal LNA amplifier before the directional coupler 3130 (or the hybrid combiner replacement), inFIG. 19 . - The operation of the
units FIG. 30 is similar, in operation and description, to 640, 624, 604, 620, 628, 606, 626, 627, 614, 610, 608, 612, 618, 630, 616 and 622 respectively, as discussed forFIG. 5 . In the modifiedNetwork unit 3005, the directional coupler 3040 (630 inFIG. 5 ) is connected to hybrid combiner 3140, and the directional coupler 3130 (616 inFIG. 5 ) is connected tohybrid combiner 3150. -
FIG. 20 shows an example of analogue implementation of the User unit 702 (FIG. 6 ) using a transmission cable as the physical medium for communication with the Network unit 3005 (602 inFIG. 5 ). TheUser unit 702 shown inFIG. 6 is modified to theunit 4005 shown inFIG. 20 to transmit to, and receive signals from, theNetwork unit 3005, which is a modified version of theNetwork unit 602 shown inFIG. 5 , over a cable capable of supporting the operating bandwidth and the frequencies of theNetwork 3005 andUser 4005 units signals. Thecable interface unit 4020 consists of aline interface unit 4150 which is connected to the transmission/reception cable 4160 and twohybrid combiners 4130 on the forward-link and 4140 on the reverse link of theUser sub unit 4010. Theline interface unit 4150 will provide the means for the load matching for connection to atransmission line 4160, and other suitable components such as the amplifiers, modulation and frequency converters (modem functionalities), for reliable transmission over thetransmission line 4160. The design of theline interface unit 4150 is dependent on thetransmission line 4160 characteristics, and is well known in the art. For example, even the in-building power lines or telephone lines can be used as the transmission line 4160 (as in homePNA), where theline interface unit 4150 is designed for such operation. The hybrid combiner (or mixer or directional coupler) 4140 is used to combine thecontrol link 4120 signal with the reverse-link signal. The hybrid combiner (or duplexer) 4130 is used to extract sufficient signal for reception and detection ofcontrol link 4120 received signal. It is also possible to use hybrid combiners instead of thedirectional coupler 4110. It is also possible, and is more desirable, to place the Forward-link Network unit 4080 internal LNA amplifier, before the directional coupler 4110 (or the hybrid combiner replacement), in diagram 20. - The operation of the
units FIG. 20 is similar, in operation and description, to 722, 734, 736, 732, 730, 728, 721, 724, 726, 716, 718 and 720 respectively, as discussed forFIG. 6 . In the modifiedUser unit 4005, the directional coupler 4110 (718 inFIG. 6 ) is connected tohybrid combiner 4130, and the Reverse-link User unit 4090 (726 inFIG. 6 ) is connected to hybrid combiner 4140. - Apart from the mentioned differences, the operation of
Network unit 3010 is similar to the operation of theNetwork unit 602 and the operation ofUser unit 4010 is similar to the operation of theUser unit 702. - The control-flow description given for
FIGS. 7, 8 , 9, 10 and 11 can also be used for the digital implementation of theNetwork unit 3005 andUser unit 4005, which is discussed above inFIGS. 19 and 20 . -
FIG. 40 shows an example of digital implementation of the Network unit 5005 (1002 inFIG. 12 ), using a transmission cable as the physical medium for communication with the User unit 6005 (2002 inFIG. 13 ). TheNetwork unit 1002 shown inFIG. 12 is modified to the unit 5005 shown inFIG. 40 to transmit to, and receive signals from, the User unit 6005 (inFIG. 50 ), which is the modified version of theUser unit 2002 shown inFIG. 13 , over a cable capable of supporting the operating bandwidth and the frequencies of the Network 5005 andUser 6005 units signals. The modifiedcable interface unit 5020 consists of aline interface unit 5220, which is connected to the transmission/reception cable 5210 and theLine Modem unit 5250. - The
line interface unit 5220 and theLine Modem unit 5250 will provide the means for the load matching for connection totransmission line 5210, and other suitable components such as the amplifiers, modulation and frequency converters, for reliable transmission over thetransmission line 5210. The design of theline interface unit 5220 is dependent on thetransmission line 5210 characteristics, and is well known in the art. For example, even the in-building power lines or telephone lines can be used as the transmission line 5210 (as in homePNA), where theline interface unit 5220 is designed for such operation. Theline modem unit 5250 may be used for modulation and demodulation AD/C, DA/C and all other modem functionalities for transmission of the signal generated by theunit 5010 and reception of signal generated byunit 6010. Also, the design of themodem unit 5250 is well known in the art, and as example technologies, homePNA and Home Networking can be mentioned. Theline modem unit 5250 is connected to data muliplexer unit 5260 anddata demultiplexer unit 5270. Theline modem unit 5250 can be implemented in either analogue or digital technology (or a mix). In the example it is assumed that theline modem unit 5250 is implemented in digital domain. - Data multiplexer unit 5260 is also connected to
Signal Conditioning unit 5110 and thecontrol link unit 5145, and is used to multiplex control samples generated bycontrol link unit 5145 and the signal samples generated by theSignal Conditioning unit 5110. The multiplexer unit 5260 can be integrated within theSignal Conditioning unit 5110. Alternatively, the output of theSignal Conditioning unit 5110 andcontrol link unit 5140 can be separately connected to theline modem unit 5250, where they are modulated on adjacent carriers for simultaneous transmission to theUser unit 6005. -
Data Demultiplexer unit 5270 is also connected toSignal Conditioning unit 5130 and thecontrol link unit 5145, and is used to demultiplex received control samples and the signal samples generated by theUser unit 6005. Thedemultiplexer unit 5270 can be integrated within theSignal Conditioning unit 5130. Alternatively, the input to theSignal Conditioning unit 5130 andcontrol link unit 5145 can be separately connected to theline modem unit 5250, if the control and data signals are modulated on adjacent carriers for simultaneous transmission by theUser unit 6005. - In Network unit 5005, the calibration signal receiver unit (1016 in
FIG. 12 ) is no longer implemented separately. As no analogue signal path is available in the reverse-link of the Network unit 5005, the calibration signal receiver unit (1016 inFIG. 12 ) is integrated and performed in theSignal Conditioning unit 5130. - The operation of the
units FIG. 30 is similar, in operation and description, to 1022, 1024, 1048, 1060, 1061, 1062, 1070, 1020, 1050, 1018, 1052, 1014, 1054, 1012, 1056, 1058, 1010, 1008, 1004 and 1006 respectively, as discussed forFIG. 12 . -
FIG. 50 shows an example of digital implementation of the User unit 6005 (2002 inFIG. 13 ) using a transmission cable as the physical medium for communication with the Network unit 5005 (1002 inFIG. 12 ). TheUser unit 2002 shown inFIG. 13 is modified to theunit 6005, shown inFIG. 50 , to transmit to, and receive signals from, the Network unit 5005, which is a modified version of theNetwork unit 1002, shown inFIG. 12 , over a cable capable of supporting the operating bandwidth and the frequencies of the Network 5005 andUser 6005 units signals. The modifiedcable interface unit 6020 consists of aline interface unit 6230 which is connected to the transmission/reception cable 6240 and theline modem unit 6220. - The
line interface unit 6230 and theLine Modem unit 6220 will provide the means for the load matching for connection totransmission line 6240, and other suitable components such as the amplifiers, modulation and frequency converters, for reliable transmission over thetransmission line 6240. The design of theline interface unit 6230 is dependent on thetransmission line 6240 characteristics, and is well known in the art. For example, even the in-building power lines or telephone lines can be used as the transmission line 6240 (as in homePNA), where theline interface unit 6230 is designed for such operation. Theline modem unit 6220 may be used for modulation and demodulation, AD/C, DA/C and all other functionalities for transmission of the signal generated by theunit 6010 and reception of signal generated by unit 5005. Also, the design of themodem unit 6220 is well known in the art, and as example technologies, homePNA and Home Networking can be mentioned. Theline modem unit 6220 is connected to data muliplexer unit 6200 anddata demultiplexer unit 6210. Theline modem unit 6220 can be implemented in either analogue or digital technology (or a mix). In the example it is assumed that theline modem unit 6220 is implemented in digital domain. -
Data multiplexer unit 6210 is also connected toSignal Conditioning unit 6140 and the control link unit 6150, and is used to multiplex control samples generated by control link unit 6150 and the signal samples generated by theSignal Conditioning unit 6140. Themultiplexer unit 6210 can be integrated within theSignal Conditioning unit 6140. Alternatively, the output of theSignal Conditioning unit 6140 and control link unit 6150 can be separately connected to theline modem unit 6220, where they are modulated on adjacent carriers for simultaneous transmission to the Network unit 5005. - Data Demultiplexer unit 6200 is also connected to
Signal Conditioning unit 6100 and the control link unit 6150, and is used to demultiplex received control samples and the signal samples generated by the User unit 5005. The demultiplexer unit 6200 can be integrated within theSignal Conditioning unit 6100. Alternatively, the input to theSignal Conditioning unit 6100 and control link unit 6150 can be separately connected to theline modem unit 6220, if the control and data signals are modulated on adjacent carriers for simultaneous transmission by the Network unit 5005. - The operation of the
units FIG. 50 is similar, in operation and description, to 2056, 2020, 2022, 2046, 2054, 2055, 2021, 2023, 2024, 2044, 2042, 2026, 2040, 2028, 2038, 2030, 2032, 2034, and 2036 respectively, as discussed forFIG. 13 . - The control-flow description given for
FIGS. 7, 8 , 9, 10 and 11 can also be used for the digital implementation of the Network unit 5005 andUser unit 6005, which is discussed above inFIGS. 21 and 22 . - Apart from the mentioned differences, the operation of
Network unit 5010 is similar to the operation of theNetwork unit 1002 and the operation ofUser unit 6010 is similar to the operation of theUser unit 2002.
Claims (128)
Priority Applications (1)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US11/369,231 US9130641B2 (en) | 2003-09-03 | 2004-09-03 | Short-range cellular booster |
Applications Claiming Priority (4)
Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
---|---|---|---|
US49969303P | 2003-09-03 | 2003-09-03 | |
US11/369,231 US9130641B2 (en) | 2003-09-03 | 2004-09-03 | Short-range cellular booster |
PCT/US2004/029123 WO2005025078A2 (en) | 2003-09-03 | 2004-09-03 | Short-range cellular booster |
WOPCT/US04/29123 | 2004-09-03 |
Publications (2)
Publication Number | Publication Date |
---|---|
US20060172781A1 true US20060172781A1 (en) | 2006-08-03 |
US9130641B2 US9130641B2 (en) | 2015-09-08 |
Family
ID=34272856
Family Applications (1)
Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
---|---|---|---|
US11/369,231 Active 2030-09-05 US9130641B2 (en) | 2003-09-03 | 2004-09-03 | Short-range cellular booster |
Country Status (11)
Country | Link |
---|---|
US (1) | US9130641B2 (en) |
EP (1) | EP1668781B1 (en) |
JP (1) | JP2007532038A (en) |
KR (1) | KR100974456B1 (en) |
CN (1) | CN101454998A (en) |
AU (4) | AU2004303118A1 (en) |
BR (1) | BRPI0414099A (en) |
CA (1) | CA2537474A1 (en) |
ES (1) | ES2540250T3 (en) |
RU (1) | RU2387075C2 (en) |
WO (1) | WO2005025078A2 (en) |
Cited By (199)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US20070155314A1 (en) * | 2004-01-12 | 2007-07-05 | Behzad Mohebbi | Short-range cellular booster |
US20070218951A1 (en) * | 2006-03-16 | 2007-09-20 | Cellynx, Inc. | Cell Phone Signal Booster |
US20070263587A1 (en) * | 2006-05-12 | 2007-11-15 | Sbc Knowleage Ventures, L.P. | Adaptive rate and reach optimization for wireless access networks |
US20080051195A1 (en) * | 2001-08-03 | 2008-02-28 | Igt | Player tracking communication mechanisms in a gaming machine |
US20090036114A1 (en) * | 2007-04-25 | 2009-02-05 | Mohebbi Behzad B | Multi-Hop Booster |
US20090247076A1 (en) * | 2006-07-21 | 2009-10-01 | Allan Bartlett | Radio frequency signal distribution using data cable system |
DE102008028732A1 (en) * | 2008-06-17 | 2009-12-24 | Andrew Wireless Systems Gmbh | repeater |
US7715441B2 (en) | 2000-04-19 | 2010-05-11 | Mosaid Technologies Incorporated | Network combining wired and non-wired segments |
US20100144285A1 (en) * | 2008-12-04 | 2010-06-10 | Broadcom Corporation | Extended antenna module and applications thereof |
US20100167639A1 (en) * | 2008-12-31 | 2010-07-01 | Chris Ranson | System and method for feedback cancellation in repeaters |
US7813451B2 (en) | 2006-01-11 | 2010-10-12 | Mobileaccess Networks Ltd. | Apparatus and method for frequency shifting of a wireless signal and systems using frequency shifting |
US20100285737A1 (en) * | 2009-05-11 | 2010-11-11 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Gain control optimizing sinr and data rate for wireless repeater |
US20110143658A1 (en) * | 2009-12-11 | 2011-06-16 | Van Hanson | System and method for determining and controlling gain margin in an rf repeater |
US20110182217A1 (en) * | 2008-04-09 | 2011-07-28 | Andrew Llc | Tdd repeater for a wireless network and method for operating said repeater |
US20110223853A1 (en) * | 2010-03-12 | 2011-09-15 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Gain control metric computation in a wireless repeater |
US20110275402A1 (en) * | 2008-09-02 | 2011-11-10 | Gopikrishna Charipadi | Communication unit and method for selective frequency synchronization in a cellular communication network |
US8078094B1 (en) * | 2007-03-21 | 2011-12-13 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Universal multi-purpose RF signal distribution system |
US8175649B2 (en) | 2008-06-20 | 2012-05-08 | Corning Mobileaccess Ltd | Method and system for real time control of an active antenna over a distributed antenna system |
US8325693B2 (en) | 2004-05-06 | 2012-12-04 | Corning Mobileaccess Ltd | System and method for carrying a wireless based signal over wiring |
WO2013070432A1 (en) * | 2011-11-10 | 2013-05-16 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Estimation of repeater loop delay for repeater gain control |
US20130128856A1 (en) * | 2010-08-09 | 2013-05-23 | Panasonic Corporation | Base station, mobile station, method for transmitting calculation parameters for power headroom, and method for transmitting power headroom |
US20130216056A1 (en) * | 2012-02-22 | 2013-08-22 | Broadcom Corporation | Non-linear echo cancellation |
US8594133B2 (en) | 2007-10-22 | 2013-11-26 | Corning Mobileaccess Ltd. | Communication system using low bandwidth wires |
US8891387B2 (en) * | 2010-05-03 | 2014-11-18 | Qualcomm Incorporated | UE based conditional enabling of ULTD |
US8897215B2 (en) | 2009-02-08 | 2014-11-25 | Corning Optical Communications Wireless Ltd | Communication system using cables carrying ethernet signals |
US20150222453A1 (en) * | 2014-01-31 | 2015-08-06 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Instruction and method for fused rake-finger operation on a vector processor |
US9184960B1 (en) | 2014-09-25 | 2015-11-10 | Corning Optical Communications Wireless Ltd | Frequency shifting a communications signal(s) in a multi-frequency distributed antenna system (DAS) to avoid or reduce frequency interference |
WO2016025889A1 (en) * | 2014-08-15 | 2016-02-18 | Nextivity, Inc. | System for coupling wireless repeater donor and server units over cable |
US9338823B2 (en) | 2012-03-23 | 2016-05-10 | Corning Optical Communications Wireless Ltd | Radio-frequency integrated circuit (RFIC) chip(s) for providing distributed antenna system functionalities, and related components, systems, and methods |
US9461706B1 (en) | 2015-07-31 | 2016-10-04 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Method and apparatus for exchanging communication signals |
US9467870B2 (en) | 2013-11-06 | 2016-10-11 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Surface-wave communications and methods thereof |
US9479266B2 (en) | 2013-12-10 | 2016-10-25 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Quasi-optical coupler |
US9490869B1 (en) | 2015-05-14 | 2016-11-08 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Transmission medium having multiple cores and methods for use therewith |
US9503189B2 (en) | 2014-10-10 | 2016-11-22 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for arranging communication sessions in a communication system |
US9509415B1 (en) | 2015-06-25 | 2016-11-29 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Methods and apparatus for inducing a fundamental wave mode on a transmission medium |
US9520945B2 (en) | 2014-10-21 | 2016-12-13 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus for providing communication services and methods thereof |
US9525524B2 (en) | 2013-05-31 | 2016-12-20 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Remote distributed antenna system |
US9525210B2 (en) | 2014-10-21 | 2016-12-20 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Guided-wave transmission device with non-fundamental mode propagation and methods for use therewith |
US9531427B2 (en) | 2014-11-20 | 2016-12-27 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Transmission device with mode division multiplexing and methods for use therewith |
US9564947B2 (en) | 2014-10-21 | 2017-02-07 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Guided-wave transmission device with diversity and methods for use therewith |
US9571209B2 (en) | 2014-10-21 | 2017-02-14 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Transmission device with impairment compensation and methods for use therewith |
US9577307B2 (en) | 2014-10-21 | 2017-02-21 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Guided-wave transmission device and methods for use therewith |
US9608740B2 (en) | 2015-07-15 | 2017-03-28 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for launching a wave mode that mitigates interference |
US9608692B2 (en) * | 2015-06-11 | 2017-03-28 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Repeater and methods for use therewith |
US20170094551A1 (en) * | 2015-09-30 | 2017-03-30 | Intel IP Corporation | Interference mitigation by a scalable digital wireless modem |
US9615269B2 (en) | 2014-10-02 | 2017-04-04 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus that provides fault tolerance in a communication network |
US9628854B2 (en) | 2014-09-29 | 2017-04-18 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for distributing content in a communication network |
US9628116B2 (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2017-04-18 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for transmitting wireless signals |
US9640850B2 (en) | 2015-06-25 | 2017-05-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Methods and apparatus for inducing a non-fundamental wave mode on a transmission medium |
US9653770B2 (en) | 2014-10-21 | 2017-05-16 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Guided wave coupler, coupling module and methods for use therewith |
US9654173B2 (en) | 2014-11-20 | 2017-05-16 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus for powering a communication device and methods thereof |
US9667317B2 (en) | 2015-06-15 | 2017-05-30 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for providing security using network traffic adjustments |
US9680670B2 (en) | 2014-11-20 | 2017-06-13 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Transmission device with channel equalization and control and methods for use therewith |
US9685992B2 (en) | 2014-10-03 | 2017-06-20 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Circuit panel network and methods thereof |
US9692101B2 (en) | 2014-08-26 | 2017-06-27 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Guided wave couplers for coupling electromagnetic waves between a waveguide surface and a surface of a wire |
US9699785B2 (en) | 2012-12-05 | 2017-07-04 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Backhaul link for distributed antenna system |
US9705571B2 (en) | 2015-09-16 | 2017-07-11 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for use with a radio distributed antenna system |
US9705561B2 (en) | 2015-04-24 | 2017-07-11 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Directional coupling device and methods for use therewith |
US9722318B2 (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2017-08-01 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for coupling an antenna to a device |
US9729197B2 (en) | 2015-10-01 | 2017-08-08 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for communicating network management traffic over a network |
US9735833B2 (en) | 2015-07-31 | 2017-08-15 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for communications management in a neighborhood network |
US9742462B2 (en) | 2014-12-04 | 2017-08-22 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Transmission medium and communication interfaces and methods for use therewith |
US9748626B2 (en) | 2015-05-14 | 2017-08-29 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Plurality of cables having different cross-sectional shapes which are bundled together to form a transmission medium |
US9749053B2 (en) | 2015-07-23 | 2017-08-29 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Node device, repeater and methods for use therewith |
US9749013B2 (en) | 2015-03-17 | 2017-08-29 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for reducing attenuation of electromagnetic waves guided by a transmission medium |
US9762289B2 (en) | 2014-10-14 | 2017-09-12 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for transmitting or receiving signals in a transportation system |
US9768833B2 (en) | 2014-09-15 | 2017-09-19 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for sensing a condition in a transmission medium of electromagnetic waves |
US9769020B2 (en) | 2014-10-21 | 2017-09-19 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for responding to events affecting communications in a communication network |
US9769128B2 (en) | 2015-09-28 | 2017-09-19 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for encryption of communications over a network |
US9780834B2 (en) | 2014-10-21 | 2017-10-03 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for transmitting electromagnetic waves |
US9793951B2 (en) | 2015-07-15 | 2017-10-17 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for launching a wave mode that mitigates interference |
US9793955B2 (en) | 2015-04-24 | 2017-10-17 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Passive electrical coupling device and methods for use therewith |
US9793954B2 (en) | 2015-04-28 | 2017-10-17 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Magnetic coupling device and methods for use therewith |
US9800327B2 (en) | 2014-11-20 | 2017-10-24 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus for controlling operations of a communication device and methods thereof |
US9813120B2 (en) | 2012-11-21 | 2017-11-07 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Base station, and method and device for returning signal |
US9820146B2 (en) | 2015-06-12 | 2017-11-14 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for authentication and identity management of communicating devices |
CN107438960A (en) * | 2015-04-27 | 2017-12-05 | 康普技术有限责任公司 | Via data network transmission modulation radio signal of communication |
US9838896B1 (en) | 2016-12-09 | 2017-12-05 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for assessing network coverage |
US9836957B2 (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2017-12-05 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for communicating with premises equipment |
US9847566B2 (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2017-12-19 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for adjusting a field of a signal to mitigate interference |
US9847850B2 (en) | 2014-10-14 | 2017-12-19 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for adjusting a mode of communication in a communication network |
US9853342B2 (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2017-12-26 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Dielectric transmission medium connector and methods for use therewith |
US9860075B1 (en) | 2016-08-26 | 2018-01-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and communication node for broadband distribution |
US9865911B2 (en) | 2015-06-25 | 2018-01-09 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Waveguide system for slot radiating first electromagnetic waves that are combined into a non-fundamental wave mode second electromagnetic wave on a transmission medium |
US9866309B2 (en) | 2015-06-03 | 2018-01-09 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Host node device and methods for use therewith |
US9871283B2 (en) | 2015-07-23 | 2018-01-16 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Transmission medium having a dielectric core comprised of plural members connected by a ball and socket configuration |
US9871282B2 (en) | 2015-05-14 | 2018-01-16 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | At least one transmission medium having a dielectric surface that is covered at least in part by a second dielectric |
US9876264B2 (en) | 2015-10-02 | 2018-01-23 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Communication system, guided wave switch and methods for use therewith |
US9876605B1 (en) | 2016-10-21 | 2018-01-23 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Launcher and coupling system to support desired guided wave mode |
US9876571B2 (en) | 2015-02-20 | 2018-01-23 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Guided-wave transmission device with non-fundamental mode propagation and methods for use therewith |
US9882277B2 (en) | 2015-10-02 | 2018-01-30 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Communication device and antenna assembly with actuated gimbal mount |
US9882257B2 (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2018-01-30 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for launching a wave mode that mitigates interference |
US9893795B1 (en) | 2016-12-07 | 2018-02-13 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Method and repeater for broadband distribution |
US9906269B2 (en) | 2014-09-17 | 2018-02-27 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Monitoring and mitigating conditions in a communication network |
US9904535B2 (en) | 2015-09-14 | 2018-02-27 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for distributing software |
US9912382B2 (en) | 2015-06-03 | 2018-03-06 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Network termination and methods for use therewith |
US9912419B1 (en) | 2016-08-24 | 2018-03-06 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for managing a fault in a distributed antenna system |
US9912027B2 (en) | 2015-07-23 | 2018-03-06 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for exchanging communication signals |
US9913139B2 (en) | 2015-06-09 | 2018-03-06 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Signal fingerprinting for authentication of communicating devices |
US9911020B1 (en) | 2016-12-08 | 2018-03-06 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for tracking via a radio frequency identification device |
US9917341B2 (en) | 2015-05-27 | 2018-03-13 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and method for launching electromagnetic waves and for modifying radial dimensions of the propagating electromagnetic waves |
US9927517B1 (en) | 2016-12-06 | 2018-03-27 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for sensing rainfall |
US20180092114A1 (en) * | 2016-09-23 | 2018-03-29 | Wilson Electronics, Llc | Location based access to selected communication bands |
US9948354B2 (en) | 2015-04-28 | 2018-04-17 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Magnetic coupling device with reflective plate and methods for use therewith |
US9948333B2 (en) | 2015-07-23 | 2018-04-17 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for wireless communications to mitigate interference |
US9954287B2 (en) | 2014-11-20 | 2018-04-24 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus for converting wireless signals and electromagnetic waves and methods thereof |
US9967173B2 (en) | 2015-07-31 | 2018-05-08 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for authentication and identity management of communicating devices |
US9973940B1 (en) | 2017-02-27 | 2018-05-15 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for dynamic impedance matching of a guided wave launcher |
US9991580B2 (en) | 2016-10-21 | 2018-06-05 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Launcher and coupling system for guided wave mode cancellation |
US9999038B2 (en) | 2013-05-31 | 2018-06-12 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Remote distributed antenna system |
US9997819B2 (en) | 2015-06-09 | 2018-06-12 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Transmission medium and method for facilitating propagation of electromagnetic waves via a core |
US9998870B1 (en) | 2016-12-08 | 2018-06-12 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for proximity sensing |
US10009901B2 (en) | 2015-09-16 | 2018-06-26 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method, apparatus, and computer-readable storage medium for managing utilization of wireless resources between base stations |
US10009065B2 (en) | 2012-12-05 | 2018-06-26 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Backhaul link for distributed antenna system |
US10009063B2 (en) | 2015-09-16 | 2018-06-26 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for use with a radio distributed antenna system having an out-of-band reference signal |
US10009067B2 (en) | 2014-12-04 | 2018-06-26 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for configuring a communication interface |
US10020587B2 (en) | 2015-07-31 | 2018-07-10 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Radial antenna and methods for use therewith |
US10020844B2 (en) | 2016-12-06 | 2018-07-10 | T&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for broadcast communication via guided waves |
US10027397B2 (en) | 2016-12-07 | 2018-07-17 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Distributed antenna system and methods for use therewith |
US10033107B2 (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2018-07-24 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for coupling an antenna to a device |
US10033108B2 (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2018-07-24 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for generating an electromagnetic wave having a wave mode that mitigates interference |
US10044409B2 (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2018-08-07 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Transmission medium and methods for use therewith |
US10051629B2 (en) | 2015-09-16 | 2018-08-14 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for use with a radio distributed antenna system having an in-band reference signal |
US10051483B2 (en) | 2015-10-16 | 2018-08-14 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for directing wireless signals |
US10069535B2 (en) | 2016-12-08 | 2018-09-04 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for launching electromagnetic waves having a certain electric field structure |
US10074890B2 (en) | 2015-10-02 | 2018-09-11 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Communication device and antenna with integrated light assembly |
US10079661B2 (en) | 2015-09-16 | 2018-09-18 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for use with a radio distributed antenna system having a clock reference |
US10090606B2 (en) | 2015-07-15 | 2018-10-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Antenna system with dielectric array and methods for use therewith |
US10090594B2 (en) | 2016-11-23 | 2018-10-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Antenna system having structural configurations for assembly |
US10103422B2 (en) | 2016-12-08 | 2018-10-16 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for mounting network devices |
US10103801B2 (en) | 2015-06-03 | 2018-10-16 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Host node device and methods for use therewith |
US10135146B2 (en) | 2016-10-18 | 2018-11-20 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for launching guided waves via circuits |
US10135145B2 (en) | 2016-12-06 | 2018-11-20 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for generating an electromagnetic wave along a transmission medium |
US10136434B2 (en) | 2015-09-16 | 2018-11-20 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for use with a radio distributed antenna system having an ultra-wideband control channel |
US10135147B2 (en) | 2016-10-18 | 2018-11-20 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for launching guided waves via an antenna |
US10142086B2 (en) | 2015-06-11 | 2018-11-27 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Repeater and methods for use therewith |
US10139820B2 (en) | 2016-12-07 | 2018-11-27 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for deploying equipment of a communication system |
US10148016B2 (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2018-12-04 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for communicating utilizing an antenna array |
US10144036B2 (en) | 2015-01-30 | 2018-12-04 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for mitigating interference affecting a propagation of electromagnetic waves guided by a transmission medium |
US10154493B2 (en) | 2015-06-03 | 2018-12-11 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Network termination and methods for use therewith |
US10168695B2 (en) | 2016-12-07 | 2019-01-01 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for controlling an unmanned aircraft |
US10170840B2 (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2019-01-01 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for sending or receiving electromagnetic signals |
US10178445B2 (en) | 2016-11-23 | 2019-01-08 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Methods, devices, and systems for load balancing between a plurality of waveguides |
US10205655B2 (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2019-02-12 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for communicating utilizing an antenna array and multiple communication paths |
US10225025B2 (en) | 2016-11-03 | 2019-03-05 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for detecting a fault in a communication system |
US10224634B2 (en) | 2016-11-03 | 2019-03-05 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Methods and apparatus for adjusting an operational characteristic of an antenna |
US10243270B2 (en) | 2016-12-07 | 2019-03-26 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Beam adaptive multi-feed dielectric antenna system and methods for use therewith |
US10243784B2 (en) | 2014-11-20 | 2019-03-26 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System for generating topology information and methods thereof |
US10264586B2 (en) | 2016-12-09 | 2019-04-16 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Cloud-based packet controller and methods for use therewith |
US20190140734A1 (en) * | 2016-11-15 | 2019-05-09 | Wilson Electronics, Llc | Desktop signal booster |
US10291311B2 (en) | 2016-09-09 | 2019-05-14 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for mitigating a fault in a distributed antenna system |
US10291334B2 (en) | 2016-11-03 | 2019-05-14 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System for detecting a fault in a communication system |
US10292067B2 (en) | 2013-11-25 | 2019-05-14 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Collaborative scheduling of last hop cellular traffic |
US10298293B2 (en) | 2017-03-13 | 2019-05-21 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus of communication utilizing wireless network devices |
US10305190B2 (en) | 2016-12-01 | 2019-05-28 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Reflecting dielectric antenna system and methods for use therewith |
US10312567B2 (en) | 2016-10-26 | 2019-06-04 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Launcher with planar strip antenna and methods for use therewith |
US10320586B2 (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2019-06-11 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for generating non-interfering electromagnetic waves on an insulated transmission medium |
US10326494B2 (en) | 2016-12-06 | 2019-06-18 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus for measurement de-embedding and methods for use therewith |
US10326689B2 (en) | 2016-12-08 | 2019-06-18 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and system for providing alternative communication paths |
US10341142B2 (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2019-07-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for generating non-interfering electromagnetic waves on an uninsulated conductor |
US10340601B2 (en) | 2016-11-23 | 2019-07-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Multi-antenna system and methods for use therewith |
US10340983B2 (en) | 2016-12-09 | 2019-07-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for surveying remote sites via guided wave communications |
US10340603B2 (en) | 2016-11-23 | 2019-07-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Antenna system having shielded structural configurations for assembly |
US10340573B2 (en) | 2016-10-26 | 2019-07-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Launcher with cylindrical coupling device and methods for use therewith |
US10340600B2 (en) | 2016-10-18 | 2019-07-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for launching guided waves via plural waveguide systems |
US10348391B2 (en) | 2015-06-03 | 2019-07-09 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Client node device with frequency conversion and methods for use therewith |
US10355367B2 (en) | 2015-10-16 | 2019-07-16 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Antenna structure for exchanging wireless signals |
US10361489B2 (en) | 2016-12-01 | 2019-07-23 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Dielectric dish antenna system and methods for use therewith |
US10359749B2 (en) | 2016-12-07 | 2019-07-23 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for utilities management via guided wave communication |
US10374316B2 (en) | 2016-10-21 | 2019-08-06 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and dielectric antenna with non-uniform dielectric |
US10382976B2 (en) | 2016-12-06 | 2019-08-13 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for managing wireless communications based on communication paths and network device positions |
US10389029B2 (en) | 2016-12-07 | 2019-08-20 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Multi-feed dielectric antenna system with core selection and methods for use therewith |
US10389037B2 (en) | 2016-12-08 | 2019-08-20 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for selecting sections of an antenna array and use therewith |
US10396887B2 (en) | 2015-06-03 | 2019-08-27 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Client node device and methods for use therewith |
US10396915B2 (en) * | 2014-12-30 | 2019-08-27 | Solid, Inc. | Interference cancellation repeater |
US10411356B2 (en) | 2016-12-08 | 2019-09-10 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for selectively targeting communication devices with an antenna array |
US10439675B2 (en) | 2016-12-06 | 2019-10-08 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for repeating guided wave communication signals |
US10446936B2 (en) | 2016-12-07 | 2019-10-15 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Multi-feed dielectric antenna system and methods for use therewith |
US10498044B2 (en) | 2016-11-03 | 2019-12-03 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus for configuring a surface of an antenna |
US10530505B2 (en) | 2016-12-08 | 2020-01-07 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for launching electromagnetic waves along a transmission medium |
US10535928B2 (en) | 2016-11-23 | 2020-01-14 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Antenna system and methods for use therewith |
US10547348B2 (en) | 2016-12-07 | 2020-01-28 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for switching transmission mediums in a communication system |
US10601494B2 (en) | 2016-12-08 | 2020-03-24 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Dual-band communication device and method for use therewith |
US10637149B2 (en) | 2016-12-06 | 2020-04-28 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Injection molded dielectric antenna and methods for use therewith |
US10650940B2 (en) | 2015-05-15 | 2020-05-12 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Transmission medium having a conductive material and methods for use therewith |
EP3523890A4 (en) * | 2016-10-07 | 2020-05-20 | Wilson Electronics, LLC | Multi-amplifier repeaters for a wireless communication system |
US10665942B2 (en) | 2015-10-16 | 2020-05-26 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for adjusting wireless communications |
US10673517B2 (en) | 2016-11-15 | 2020-06-02 | Wilson Electronics, Llc | Desktop signal booster |
US10679767B2 (en) | 2015-05-15 | 2020-06-09 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Transmission medium having a conductive material and methods for use therewith |
US10694379B2 (en) | 2016-12-06 | 2020-06-23 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Waveguide system with device-based authentication and methods for use therewith |
US10727599B2 (en) | 2016-12-06 | 2020-07-28 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Launcher with slot antenna and methods for use therewith |
US10755542B2 (en) | 2016-12-06 | 2020-08-25 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for surveillance via guided wave communication |
US10777873B2 (en) | 2016-12-08 | 2020-09-15 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for mounting network devices |
US10784670B2 (en) | 2015-07-23 | 2020-09-22 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Antenna support for aligning an antenna |
US10811767B2 (en) | 2016-10-21 | 2020-10-20 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and dielectric antenna with convex dielectric radome |
US10819035B2 (en) | 2016-12-06 | 2020-10-27 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Launcher with helical antenna and methods for use therewith |
US10916969B2 (en) | 2016-12-08 | 2021-02-09 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for providing power using an inductive coupling |
US10938108B2 (en) | 2016-12-08 | 2021-03-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Frequency selective multi-feed dielectric antenna system and methods for use therewith |
US11032819B2 (en) | 2016-09-15 | 2021-06-08 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for use with a radio distributed antenna system having a control channel reference signal |
Families Citing this family (21)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
KR101335015B1 (en) | 2006-05-15 | 2013-12-02 | 에스케이텔레콤 주식회사 | Repeater system and method for frequency converting |
WO2008058155A2 (en) | 2006-11-06 | 2008-05-15 | Nextivity, Inc. | Variable gain antenna for cellular repeater |
CN101647212A (en) | 2007-01-16 | 2010-02-10 | 耐克斯迪维蒂股份有限公司 | Multi-hop booster |
ES2623847T3 (en) | 2007-06-01 | 2017-07-12 | Nextivity, Inc. | Short range amplifier and methods for amplifying with multiple antennas |
KR20100091172A (en) | 2007-10-11 | 2010-08-18 | 넥스티비티 인코포레이티드 | Repeater for use in a cdma link |
FI20085194A0 (en) * | 2008-02-29 | 2008-02-29 | Nokia Siemens Networks Oy | Method and apparatus for switching procedure in a telecommunications network with extension of extended transmission |
JP5171470B2 (en) * | 2008-08-08 | 2013-03-27 | 日本無線株式会社 | Relay system |
ES2733093T3 (en) * | 2009-02-13 | 2019-11-27 | Nextivity Inc | Remote control for amplifier |
JP4954238B2 (en) * | 2009-04-27 | 2012-06-13 | 株式会社エヌ・ティ・ティ・ドコモ | Mobile communication system |
JP4937296B2 (en) * | 2009-04-27 | 2012-05-23 | 株式会社エヌ・ティ・ティ・ドコモ | Mobile communication system |
JP5072900B2 (en) * | 2009-04-27 | 2012-11-14 | 株式会社エヌ・ティ・ティ・ドコモ | Handover method |
KR20110039683A (en) * | 2009-10-12 | 2011-04-20 | 영우통신 주식회사 | Digital transmission repeater for mobile communication system based on cdma/wcdma and method for transmission at the same |
JP5522267B2 (en) * | 2010-12-01 | 2014-06-18 | 日本電気株式会社 | Radio base station, relay base station, mobile terminal, mobile communication system, and operation control method |
US10862529B2 (en) | 2015-08-18 | 2020-12-08 | Wilson Electronics, Llc | Separate uplink and downlink antenna repeater architecture |
WO2017031194A1 (en) * | 2015-08-18 | 2017-02-23 | Wilson Electronics, Llc | Wireless device signal amplifier |
KR101681850B1 (en) | 2015-11-12 | 2016-12-01 | 주식회사 알피원 | Radio communication system using ism band |
CA3058659A1 (en) * | 2017-04-07 | 2018-10-11 | Wilson Electronics, Llc | Multi-amplifier repeater system for wireless communication |
WO2018191432A1 (en) | 2017-04-11 | 2018-10-18 | Wilson Electronics, Llc | Signal booster with coaxial cable connections |
EP3509229B1 (en) * | 2018-01-04 | 2022-03-02 | Wilson Electronics, LLC | Detection of line loss in signal booster system |
US11658755B2 (en) * | 2021-03-05 | 2023-05-23 | Perspecta Labs Inc. | Interference mitigation in multi-antenna system |
US11901931B2 (en) * | 2021-09-09 | 2024-02-13 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Transmit diversity power leakage detection and filtering in antenna compensator power detector |
Citations (15)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US5875179A (en) * | 1996-10-29 | 1999-02-23 | Proxim, Inc. | Method and apparatus for synchronized communication over wireless backbone architecture |
US5950124A (en) * | 1995-09-06 | 1999-09-07 | Telxon Corporation | Cellular communication system with dynamically modified data transmission parameters |
US6009324A (en) * | 1996-03-04 | 1999-12-28 | Allgon Ab | Method and device for monitoring a mobile telephone repeater |
US6195045B1 (en) * | 1999-01-29 | 2001-02-27 | Cwill Telecommunication, Inc. | Adaptive antenna array system calibration |
US20010002903A1 (en) * | 1999-12-07 | 2001-06-07 | Lg Electronics Inc. | DTMF transmission structure of W-CDMA WLL system |
US20020045461A1 (en) * | 2000-10-18 | 2002-04-18 | David Bongfeldt | Adaptive coverage area control in an on-frequency repeater |
US6404775B1 (en) * | 1997-11-21 | 2002-06-11 | Allen Telecom Inc. | Band-changing repeater with protocol or format conversion |
US20020115409A1 (en) * | 2001-02-21 | 2002-08-22 | Khayrallah Ali S. | Method to achieve diversity in a communication network |
US20030099221A1 (en) * | 2001-11-28 | 2003-05-29 | Sokwoo Rhee | Network protocol |
US20030104781A1 (en) * | 2001-12-03 | 2003-06-05 | Son O. Sung | Modular residential radio frequency converting repeater |
WO2005008916A1 (en) * | 2003-07-19 | 2005-01-27 | Solid Technologies, Inc. | Echo cancellation method and wireless repeater with echo canceller unit |
US20050176452A1 (en) * | 2003-02-14 | 2005-08-11 | Perlman Stephen G. | Self-configuring, adaptive, three-dimensional, wireless network |
US20060046642A1 (en) * | 2003-11-28 | 2006-03-02 | Consistel Pte Ltd. | Wireless communication system and lift system having the same |
US7477694B2 (en) * | 2001-03-30 | 2009-01-13 | M&Fc Holding, Llc | Enhanced wireless packet data communication system, method, and apparatus applicable to both wide area networks and local area networks |
US7480485B1 (en) * | 2004-01-07 | 2009-01-20 | Sprint Spectrum L.P. | Radio frequency repeater with automated block/channel selection |
Family Cites Families (14)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
CA1065020A (en) | 1974-06-27 | 1979-10-23 | William L. Hatton | High reliability diversity communications system |
JPH0326031A (en) * | 1989-06-22 | 1991-02-04 | Toyo Commun Equip Co Ltd | Relay system and repeater |
JPH0620188B2 (en) * | 1989-09-22 | 1994-03-16 | 富士テック株式会社 | Wireless repeater |
US5187806A (en) | 1990-02-16 | 1993-02-16 | Johnson Edward R | Apparatus and method for expanding cellular system capacity |
WO1994023504A1 (en) | 1993-03-31 | 1994-10-13 | British Telecommunications Public Limited Company | Radio repeater |
US5854571A (en) | 1993-10-28 | 1998-12-29 | Motorola Inc. | Method and apparatus for controlling a peak envelope power of a power amplifier |
US5847663A (en) | 1994-03-04 | 1998-12-08 | Chasek; Norman E. | Multi purpose communications system for intelligent roadways based on time-companded, spoken advisories |
US5604789A (en) * | 1994-07-01 | 1997-02-18 | U S West Technologies, Inc. | Method and system for providing a digital wireless local loop |
JP2000354001A (en) * | 1999-06-10 | 2000-12-19 | Toyo Commun Equip Co Ltd | Relay system for dead zone |
US20020028655A1 (en) | 2000-07-14 | 2002-03-07 | Rosener Douglas K. | Repeater system |
US7088953B2 (en) | 2000-10-18 | 2006-08-08 | Spotwave Wireless Canada Inc. | Coverage area signature in an on-frequency repeater |
US6735448B1 (en) * | 2000-11-07 | 2004-05-11 | Hrl Laboratories, Llc | Power management for throughput enhancement in wireless ad-hoc networks |
JP3842680B2 (en) * | 2001-09-28 | 2006-11-08 | 日本放送協会 | Rounding canceller and multistage relay system |
US6895218B2 (en) | 2001-10-11 | 2005-05-17 | Sprint Spectrum L.P. | Method for in-building distribution using wireless access technology |
-
2004
- 2004-09-03 BR BRPI0414099-0A patent/BRPI0414099A/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 2004-09-03 ES ES04783394.2T patent/ES2540250T3/en active Active
- 2004-09-03 CA CA002537474A patent/CA2537474A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2004-09-03 AU AU2004303118A patent/AU2004303118A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2004-09-03 KR KR1020067006351A patent/KR100974456B1/en active IP Right Grant
- 2004-09-03 US US11/369,231 patent/US9130641B2/en active Active
- 2004-09-03 RU RU2006110628/09A patent/RU2387075C2/en not_active IP Right Cessation
- 2004-09-03 CN CNA2004800298994A patent/CN101454998A/en active Pending
- 2004-09-03 EP EP04783394.2A patent/EP1668781B1/en active Active
- 2004-09-03 JP JP2006526235A patent/JP2007532038A/en active Pending
- 2004-09-03 WO PCT/US2004/029123 patent/WO2005025078A2/en not_active Application Discontinuation
-
2010
- 2010-12-10 AU AU2010249287A patent/AU2010249287A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2010-12-10 AU AU2010249288A patent/AU2010249288A1/en not_active Abandoned
- 2010-12-10 AU AU2010249286A patent/AU2010249286A1/en not_active Abandoned
Patent Citations (15)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US5950124A (en) * | 1995-09-06 | 1999-09-07 | Telxon Corporation | Cellular communication system with dynamically modified data transmission parameters |
US6009324A (en) * | 1996-03-04 | 1999-12-28 | Allgon Ab | Method and device for monitoring a mobile telephone repeater |
US5875179A (en) * | 1996-10-29 | 1999-02-23 | Proxim, Inc. | Method and apparatus for synchronized communication over wireless backbone architecture |
US6404775B1 (en) * | 1997-11-21 | 2002-06-11 | Allen Telecom Inc. | Band-changing repeater with protocol or format conversion |
US6195045B1 (en) * | 1999-01-29 | 2001-02-27 | Cwill Telecommunication, Inc. | Adaptive antenna array system calibration |
US20010002903A1 (en) * | 1999-12-07 | 2001-06-07 | Lg Electronics Inc. | DTMF transmission structure of W-CDMA WLL system |
US20020045461A1 (en) * | 2000-10-18 | 2002-04-18 | David Bongfeldt | Adaptive coverage area control in an on-frequency repeater |
US20020115409A1 (en) * | 2001-02-21 | 2002-08-22 | Khayrallah Ali S. | Method to achieve diversity in a communication network |
US7477694B2 (en) * | 2001-03-30 | 2009-01-13 | M&Fc Holding, Llc | Enhanced wireless packet data communication system, method, and apparatus applicable to both wide area networks and local area networks |
US20030099221A1 (en) * | 2001-11-28 | 2003-05-29 | Sokwoo Rhee | Network protocol |
US20030104781A1 (en) * | 2001-12-03 | 2003-06-05 | Son O. Sung | Modular residential radio frequency converting repeater |
US20050176452A1 (en) * | 2003-02-14 | 2005-08-11 | Perlman Stephen G. | Self-configuring, adaptive, three-dimensional, wireless network |
WO2005008916A1 (en) * | 2003-07-19 | 2005-01-27 | Solid Technologies, Inc. | Echo cancellation method and wireless repeater with echo canceller unit |
US20060046642A1 (en) * | 2003-11-28 | 2006-03-02 | Consistel Pte Ltd. | Wireless communication system and lift system having the same |
US7480485B1 (en) * | 2004-01-07 | 2009-01-20 | Sprint Spectrum L.P. | Radio frequency repeater with automated block/channel selection |
Cited By (321)
Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
---|---|---|---|---|
US8982903B2 (en) | 2000-04-19 | 2015-03-17 | Conversant Intellectual Property Management Inc. | Network combining wired and non-wired segments |
US8289991B2 (en) | 2000-04-19 | 2012-10-16 | Mosaid Technologies Incorporated | Network combining wired and non-wired segments |
US7933297B2 (en) | 2000-04-19 | 2011-04-26 | Mosaid Technologies Incorporated | Network combining wired and non-wired segments |
US7876767B2 (en) | 2000-04-19 | 2011-01-25 | Mosaid Technologies Incorporated | Network combining wired and non-wired segments |
US8848725B2 (en) | 2000-04-19 | 2014-09-30 | Conversant Intellectual Property Management Incorporated | Network combining wired and non-wired segments |
US7715441B2 (en) | 2000-04-19 | 2010-05-11 | Mosaid Technologies Incorporated | Network combining wired and non-wired segments |
US8873586B2 (en) | 2000-04-19 | 2014-10-28 | Conversant Intellectual Property Management Incorporated | Network combining wired and non-wired segments |
US8982904B2 (en) | 2000-04-19 | 2015-03-17 | Conversant Intellectual Property Management Inc. | Network combining wired and non-wired segments |
US8867506B2 (en) | 2000-04-19 | 2014-10-21 | Conversant Intellectual Property Management Incorporated | Network combining wired and non-wired segments |
US8873575B2 (en) | 2000-04-19 | 2014-10-28 | Conversant Intellectual Property Management Incorporated | Network combining wired and non-wired segments |
US20080051195A1 (en) * | 2001-08-03 | 2008-02-28 | Igt | Player tracking communication mechanisms in a gaming machine |
US20070155314A1 (en) * | 2004-01-12 | 2007-07-05 | Behzad Mohebbi | Short-range cellular booster |
US7519323B2 (en) * | 2004-01-12 | 2009-04-14 | Nextivity, Inc. | Short-range cellular booster |
US8325759B2 (en) | 2004-05-06 | 2012-12-04 | Corning Mobileaccess Ltd | System and method for carrying a wireless based signal over wiring |
US8325693B2 (en) | 2004-05-06 | 2012-12-04 | Corning Mobileaccess Ltd | System and method for carrying a wireless based signal over wiring |
US7813451B2 (en) | 2006-01-11 | 2010-10-12 | Mobileaccess Networks Ltd. | Apparatus and method for frequency shifting of a wireless signal and systems using frequency shifting |
US8184681B2 (en) | 2006-01-11 | 2012-05-22 | Corning Mobileaccess Ltd | Apparatus and method for frequency shifting of a wireless signal and systems using frequency shifting |
US20070218951A1 (en) * | 2006-03-16 | 2007-09-20 | Cellynx, Inc. | Cell Phone Signal Booster |
US8005513B2 (en) | 2006-03-16 | 2011-08-23 | Cellynx, Inc. | Cell phone signal booster |
US10952225B2 (en) | 2006-05-12 | 2021-03-16 | Sbc Knowledge Ventures, L.P. | Adaptive rate and reach optimization for wireless access networks |
US9949274B2 (en) | 2006-05-12 | 2018-04-17 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Adaptive rate and reach optimization for wireless access networks |
US20070263587A1 (en) * | 2006-05-12 | 2007-11-15 | Sbc Knowleage Ventures, L.P. | Adaptive rate and reach optimization for wireless access networks |
US8503419B2 (en) | 2006-05-12 | 2013-08-06 | At&T Intellectual Property I. L.P. | Adaptive rate and reach optimization for wireless access networks |
US8064413B2 (en) * | 2006-05-12 | 2011-11-22 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Adaptive rate and reach optimization for wireless access networks |
US20090247076A1 (en) * | 2006-07-21 | 2009-10-01 | Allan Bartlett | Radio frequency signal distribution using data cable system |
US8346163B2 (en) * | 2006-07-21 | 2013-01-01 | Vodafone Group Plc | Radio frequency signal distribution using data cable system |
US8078094B1 (en) * | 2007-03-21 | 2011-12-13 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Universal multi-purpose RF signal distribution system |
US8682311B2 (en) * | 2007-04-25 | 2014-03-25 | Nextivity, Inc. | Multi-hop booster |
US20090036114A1 (en) * | 2007-04-25 | 2009-02-05 | Mohebbi Behzad B | Multi-Hop Booster |
US8594133B2 (en) | 2007-10-22 | 2013-11-26 | Corning Mobileaccess Ltd. | Communication system using low bandwidth wires |
US9813229B2 (en) | 2007-10-22 | 2017-11-07 | Corning Optical Communications Wireless Ltd | Communication system using low bandwidth wires |
US9549301B2 (en) | 2007-12-17 | 2017-01-17 | Corning Optical Communications Wireless Ltd | Method and system for real time control of an active antenna over a distributed antenna system |
US20110182217A1 (en) * | 2008-04-09 | 2011-07-28 | Andrew Llc | Tdd repeater for a wireless network and method for operating said repeater |
US9219524B2 (en) | 2008-04-09 | 2015-12-22 | Andrew Wireless Systems Gmbh | TDD repeater for a wireless network and method for operating said repeater |
US10651893B2 (en) | 2008-04-09 | 2020-05-12 | Andrew Wireless Systems Gmbh | TDD repeater for a wireless network and method for operating said repeater |
US8730848B2 (en) | 2008-04-09 | 2014-05-20 | Andrew Llc | TDD repeater for a wireless network and method for operating said repeater |
DE102008028732A1 (en) * | 2008-06-17 | 2009-12-24 | Andrew Wireless Systems Gmbh | repeater |
US8320957B2 (en) * | 2008-06-20 | 2012-11-27 | Corning Mobileaccess Ltd | Method and system for real time control of an active antenna over a distributed antenna system |
US8175649B2 (en) | 2008-06-20 | 2012-05-08 | Corning Mobileaccess Ltd | Method and system for real time control of an active antenna over a distributed antenna system |
US8768400B2 (en) * | 2008-09-02 | 2014-07-01 | Ip.Access Limited | Communication unit and method for selective frequency synchronization in a cellular communication network |
US20110275402A1 (en) * | 2008-09-02 | 2011-11-10 | Gopikrishna Charipadi | Communication unit and method for selective frequency synchronization in a cellular communication network |
US8270925B2 (en) * | 2008-12-04 | 2012-09-18 | Broadcom Corporation | Extended antenna module and applications thereof |
US20100144285A1 (en) * | 2008-12-04 | 2010-06-10 | Broadcom Corporation | Extended antenna module and applications thereof |
US8135339B2 (en) | 2008-12-31 | 2012-03-13 | Andrew Llc | System and method for feedback cancellation in repeaters |
US20100167639A1 (en) * | 2008-12-31 | 2010-07-01 | Chris Ranson | System and method for feedback cancellation in repeaters |
US8571470B2 (en) | 2008-12-31 | 2013-10-29 | Andrew Llc | System and method for feedback cancellation in repeaters |
US8351851B2 (en) | 2008-12-31 | 2013-01-08 | Andrew Llc | System and method for feedback cancellation in repeaters |
US8897215B2 (en) | 2009-02-08 | 2014-11-25 | Corning Optical Communications Wireless Ltd | Communication system using cables carrying ethernet signals |
US8867987B2 (en) * | 2009-05-11 | 2014-10-21 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Gain control metric computation in a wireless repeater |
US8874027B2 (en) | 2009-05-11 | 2014-10-28 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Gain control optimizing SINR and data rate for wireless repeater |
US20100285739A1 (en) * | 2009-05-11 | 2010-11-11 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Multi-metric gain control for wireless repeater |
US20100285742A1 (en) * | 2009-05-11 | 2010-11-11 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Gain control metric pruning in a wireless repeater |
US8463176B2 (en) | 2009-05-11 | 2013-06-11 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Stability indicator for a wireless repeater |
US20100285744A1 (en) * | 2009-05-11 | 2010-11-11 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Gain control metric computation in a wireless repeater |
US20100285740A1 (en) * | 2009-05-11 | 2010-11-11 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Stability indicator for a wireless repeater |
US8452230B2 (en) * | 2009-05-11 | 2013-05-28 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Multi-metric gain control for wireless repeater |
US20100285741A1 (en) * | 2009-05-11 | 2010-11-11 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Gain adjustment stepping control in a wireless repeater |
US8886115B2 (en) * | 2009-05-11 | 2014-11-11 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Gain control metric pruning in a wireless repeater |
US20100285737A1 (en) * | 2009-05-11 | 2010-11-11 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Gain control optimizing sinr and data rate for wireless repeater |
US8265546B2 (en) | 2009-05-11 | 2012-09-11 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Gain adjustment stepping control in a wireless repeater |
US8948687B2 (en) | 2009-12-11 | 2015-02-03 | Andrew Llc | System and method for determining and controlling gain margin in an RF repeater |
USRE47075E1 (en) | 2009-12-11 | 2018-10-02 | Commscope Technologies Llc | System and method for determining and controlling gain margin in an RF repeater |
US20110143658A1 (en) * | 2009-12-11 | 2011-06-16 | Van Hanson | System and method for determining and controlling gain margin in an rf repeater |
US8548375B2 (en) * | 2010-03-12 | 2013-10-01 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Gain control metric computation in a wireless repeater |
US20110223853A1 (en) * | 2010-03-12 | 2011-09-15 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Gain control metric computation in a wireless repeater |
US8891387B2 (en) * | 2010-05-03 | 2014-11-18 | Qualcomm Incorporated | UE based conditional enabling of ULTD |
US20130128856A1 (en) * | 2010-08-09 | 2013-05-23 | Panasonic Corporation | Base station, mobile station, method for transmitting calculation parameters for power headroom, and method for transmitting power headroom |
US9036584B2 (en) * | 2010-08-09 | 2015-05-19 | Panasonic Intellectual Property Corporation Of America | Base station, mobile station, method for transmitting calculation parameters for power headroom, and method for transmitting power headroom |
US8774708B2 (en) | 2011-11-10 | 2014-07-08 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Estimation of repeater loop delay for repeater gain control |
WO2013070432A1 (en) * | 2011-11-10 | 2013-05-16 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Estimation of repeater loop delay for repeater gain control |
US9036826B2 (en) | 2012-02-22 | 2015-05-19 | Broadcom Corporation | Echo cancellation using closed-form solutions |
US20130216056A1 (en) * | 2012-02-22 | 2013-08-22 | Broadcom Corporation | Non-linear echo cancellation |
US9065895B2 (en) * | 2012-02-22 | 2015-06-23 | Broadcom Corporation | Non-linear echo cancellation |
US9338823B2 (en) | 2012-03-23 | 2016-05-10 | Corning Optical Communications Wireless Ltd | Radio-frequency integrated circuit (RFIC) chip(s) for providing distributed antenna system functionalities, and related components, systems, and methods |
US9948329B2 (en) | 2012-03-23 | 2018-04-17 | Corning Optical Communications Wireless, LTD | Radio-frequency integrated circuit (RFIC) chip(s) for providing distributed antenna system functionalities, and related components, systems, and methods |
US10141959B2 (en) | 2012-03-23 | 2018-11-27 | Corning Optical Communications Wireless Ltd | Radio-frequency integrated circuit (RFIC) chip(s) for providing distributed antenna system functionalities, and related components, systems, and methods |
US9813120B2 (en) | 2012-11-21 | 2017-11-07 | Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. | Base station, and method and device for returning signal |
US10194437B2 (en) | 2012-12-05 | 2019-01-29 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Backhaul link for distributed antenna system |
US9788326B2 (en) | 2012-12-05 | 2017-10-10 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Backhaul link for distributed antenna system |
US10009065B2 (en) | 2012-12-05 | 2018-06-26 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Backhaul link for distributed antenna system |
US9699785B2 (en) | 2012-12-05 | 2017-07-04 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Backhaul link for distributed antenna system |
US9999038B2 (en) | 2013-05-31 | 2018-06-12 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Remote distributed antenna system |
US9525524B2 (en) | 2013-05-31 | 2016-12-20 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Remote distributed antenna system |
US10091787B2 (en) | 2013-05-31 | 2018-10-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Remote distributed antenna system |
US10051630B2 (en) | 2013-05-31 | 2018-08-14 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Remote distributed antenna system |
US9930668B2 (en) | 2013-05-31 | 2018-03-27 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Remote distributed antenna system |
US9674711B2 (en) | 2013-11-06 | 2017-06-06 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Surface-wave communications and methods thereof |
US9467870B2 (en) | 2013-11-06 | 2016-10-11 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Surface-wave communications and methods thereof |
US9661505B2 (en) | 2013-11-06 | 2017-05-23 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Surface-wave communications and methods thereof |
US11533650B2 (en) | 2013-11-25 | 2022-12-20 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Collaborative scheduling of last hop cellular traffic |
US10292067B2 (en) | 2013-11-25 | 2019-05-14 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Collaborative scheduling of last hop cellular traffic |
US9876584B2 (en) | 2013-12-10 | 2018-01-23 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Quasi-optical coupler |
US9794003B2 (en) | 2013-12-10 | 2017-10-17 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Quasi-optical coupler |
US9479266B2 (en) | 2013-12-10 | 2016-10-25 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Quasi-optical coupler |
US9276778B2 (en) * | 2014-01-31 | 2016-03-01 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Instruction and method for fused rake-finger operation on a vector processor |
US20150222453A1 (en) * | 2014-01-31 | 2015-08-06 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Instruction and method for fused rake-finger operation on a vector processor |
US9397743B2 (en) | 2014-08-15 | 2016-07-19 | Nextivity, Inc. | System for coupling wireless repeater donor and server units over cable |
AU2015301469B2 (en) * | 2014-08-15 | 2019-08-29 | Nextivity, Inc. | System for coupling wireless repeater donor and server units over cable |
WO2016025889A1 (en) * | 2014-08-15 | 2016-02-18 | Nextivity, Inc. | System for coupling wireless repeater donor and server units over cable |
US10044431B2 (en) | 2014-08-15 | 2018-08-07 | Nextivity, Inc. | System for coupling wireless repeater donor and server units over cable |
US9692101B2 (en) | 2014-08-26 | 2017-06-27 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Guided wave couplers for coupling electromagnetic waves between a waveguide surface and a surface of a wire |
US10096881B2 (en) | 2014-08-26 | 2018-10-09 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Guided wave couplers for coupling electromagnetic waves to an outer surface of a transmission medium |
US9768833B2 (en) | 2014-09-15 | 2017-09-19 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for sensing a condition in a transmission medium of electromagnetic waves |
US10063280B2 (en) | 2014-09-17 | 2018-08-28 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Monitoring and mitigating conditions in a communication network |
US9906269B2 (en) | 2014-09-17 | 2018-02-27 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Monitoring and mitigating conditions in a communication network |
US9253003B1 (en) | 2014-09-25 | 2016-02-02 | Corning Optical Communications Wireless Ltd | Frequency shifting a communications signal(S) in a multi-frequency distributed antenna system (DAS) to avoid or reduce frequency interference |
US9515855B2 (en) | 2014-09-25 | 2016-12-06 | Corning Optical Communications Wireless Ltd | Frequency shifting a communications signal(s) in a multi-frequency distributed antenna system (DAS) to avoid or reduce frequency interference |
US9184960B1 (en) | 2014-09-25 | 2015-11-10 | Corning Optical Communications Wireless Ltd | Frequency shifting a communications signal(s) in a multi-frequency distributed antenna system (DAS) to avoid or reduce frequency interference |
US9628854B2 (en) | 2014-09-29 | 2017-04-18 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for distributing content in a communication network |
US9998932B2 (en) | 2014-10-02 | 2018-06-12 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus that provides fault tolerance in a communication network |
US9615269B2 (en) | 2014-10-02 | 2017-04-04 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus that provides fault tolerance in a communication network |
US9973416B2 (en) | 2014-10-02 | 2018-05-15 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus that provides fault tolerance in a communication network |
US9685992B2 (en) | 2014-10-03 | 2017-06-20 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Circuit panel network and methods thereof |
US9503189B2 (en) | 2014-10-10 | 2016-11-22 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for arranging communication sessions in a communication system |
US9866276B2 (en) | 2014-10-10 | 2018-01-09 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for arranging communication sessions in a communication system |
US9762289B2 (en) | 2014-10-14 | 2017-09-12 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for transmitting or receiving signals in a transportation system |
US9847850B2 (en) | 2014-10-14 | 2017-12-19 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for adjusting a mode of communication in a communication network |
US9577306B2 (en) | 2014-10-21 | 2017-02-21 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Guided-wave transmission device and methods for use therewith |
US9525210B2 (en) | 2014-10-21 | 2016-12-20 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Guided-wave transmission device with non-fundamental mode propagation and methods for use therewith |
US9653770B2 (en) | 2014-10-21 | 2017-05-16 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Guided wave coupler, coupling module and methods for use therewith |
US9780834B2 (en) | 2014-10-21 | 2017-10-03 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for transmitting electromagnetic waves |
US9948355B2 (en) | 2014-10-21 | 2018-04-17 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus for providing communication services and methods thereof |
US9564947B2 (en) | 2014-10-21 | 2017-02-07 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Guided-wave transmission device with diversity and methods for use therewith |
US9571209B2 (en) | 2014-10-21 | 2017-02-14 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Transmission device with impairment compensation and methods for use therewith |
US9912033B2 (en) | 2014-10-21 | 2018-03-06 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Guided wave coupler, coupling module and methods for use therewith |
US9596001B2 (en) | 2014-10-21 | 2017-03-14 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus for providing communication services and methods thereof |
US9705610B2 (en) | 2014-10-21 | 2017-07-11 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Transmission device with impairment compensation and methods for use therewith |
US9520945B2 (en) | 2014-10-21 | 2016-12-13 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus for providing communication services and methods thereof |
US9577307B2 (en) | 2014-10-21 | 2017-02-21 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Guided-wave transmission device and methods for use therewith |
US9876587B2 (en) | 2014-10-21 | 2018-01-23 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Transmission device with impairment compensation and methods for use therewith |
US9627768B2 (en) | 2014-10-21 | 2017-04-18 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Guided-wave transmission device with non-fundamental mode propagation and methods for use therewith |
US9871558B2 (en) | 2014-10-21 | 2018-01-16 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Guided-wave transmission device and methods for use therewith |
US9960808B2 (en) | 2014-10-21 | 2018-05-01 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Guided-wave transmission device and methods for use therewith |
US9954286B2 (en) | 2014-10-21 | 2018-04-24 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Guided-wave transmission device with non-fundamental mode propagation and methods for use therewith |
US9769020B2 (en) | 2014-10-21 | 2017-09-19 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for responding to events affecting communications in a communication network |
US9544006B2 (en) | 2014-11-20 | 2017-01-10 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Transmission device with mode division multiplexing and methods for use therewith |
US9712350B2 (en) | 2014-11-20 | 2017-07-18 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Transmission device with channel equalization and control and methods for use therewith |
US9800327B2 (en) | 2014-11-20 | 2017-10-24 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus for controlling operations of a communication device and methods thereof |
US10243784B2 (en) | 2014-11-20 | 2019-03-26 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System for generating topology information and methods thereof |
US9749083B2 (en) | 2014-11-20 | 2017-08-29 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Transmission device with mode division multiplexing and methods for use therewith |
US9654173B2 (en) | 2014-11-20 | 2017-05-16 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus for powering a communication device and methods thereof |
US9742521B2 (en) | 2014-11-20 | 2017-08-22 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Transmission device with mode division multiplexing and methods for use therewith |
US9954287B2 (en) | 2014-11-20 | 2018-04-24 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus for converting wireless signals and electromagnetic waves and methods thereof |
US9531427B2 (en) | 2014-11-20 | 2016-12-27 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Transmission device with mode division multiplexing and methods for use therewith |
US9680670B2 (en) | 2014-11-20 | 2017-06-13 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Transmission device with channel equalization and control and methods for use therewith |
US9742462B2 (en) | 2014-12-04 | 2017-08-22 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Transmission medium and communication interfaces and methods for use therewith |
US10009067B2 (en) | 2014-12-04 | 2018-06-26 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for configuring a communication interface |
US10396915B2 (en) * | 2014-12-30 | 2019-08-27 | Solid, Inc. | Interference cancellation repeater |
US10144036B2 (en) | 2015-01-30 | 2018-12-04 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for mitigating interference affecting a propagation of electromagnetic waves guided by a transmission medium |
US9876570B2 (en) | 2015-02-20 | 2018-01-23 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Guided-wave transmission device with non-fundamental mode propagation and methods for use therewith |
US9876571B2 (en) | 2015-02-20 | 2018-01-23 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Guided-wave transmission device with non-fundamental mode propagation and methods for use therewith |
US9749013B2 (en) | 2015-03-17 | 2017-08-29 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for reducing attenuation of electromagnetic waves guided by a transmission medium |
US9705561B2 (en) | 2015-04-24 | 2017-07-11 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Directional coupling device and methods for use therewith |
US9831912B2 (en) | 2015-04-24 | 2017-11-28 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Directional coupling device and methods for use therewith |
US9793955B2 (en) | 2015-04-24 | 2017-10-17 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Passive electrical coupling device and methods for use therewith |
US10224981B2 (en) | 2015-04-24 | 2019-03-05 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Passive electrical coupling device and methods for use therewith |
EP3289730A4 (en) * | 2015-04-27 | 2018-12-26 | CommScope Technologies LLC | Transport of modulated radio communication signals over data networks |
US10879993B2 (en) | 2015-04-27 | 2020-12-29 | Commscope Technologies Llc | Transport of modulated radio communication signals over data networks |
US10797782B2 (en) | 2015-04-27 | 2020-10-06 | Commscope Technologies Llc | Transport of modulated radio communication signals over data networks |
CN107438960A (en) * | 2015-04-27 | 2017-12-05 | 康普技术有限责任公司 | Via data network transmission modulation radio signal of communication |
US9793954B2 (en) | 2015-04-28 | 2017-10-17 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Magnetic coupling device and methods for use therewith |
US9948354B2 (en) | 2015-04-28 | 2018-04-17 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Magnetic coupling device with reflective plate and methods for use therewith |
US9748626B2 (en) | 2015-05-14 | 2017-08-29 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Plurality of cables having different cross-sectional shapes which are bundled together to form a transmission medium |
US9871282B2 (en) | 2015-05-14 | 2018-01-16 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | At least one transmission medium having a dielectric surface that is covered at least in part by a second dielectric |
US9490869B1 (en) | 2015-05-14 | 2016-11-08 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Transmission medium having multiple cores and methods for use therewith |
US9887447B2 (en) | 2015-05-14 | 2018-02-06 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Transmission medium having multiple cores and methods for use therewith |
US10650940B2 (en) | 2015-05-15 | 2020-05-12 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Transmission medium having a conductive material and methods for use therewith |
US10679767B2 (en) | 2015-05-15 | 2020-06-09 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Transmission medium having a conductive material and methods for use therewith |
US9917341B2 (en) | 2015-05-27 | 2018-03-13 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and method for launching electromagnetic waves and for modifying radial dimensions of the propagating electromagnetic waves |
US10154493B2 (en) | 2015-06-03 | 2018-12-11 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Network termination and methods for use therewith |
US9935703B2 (en) | 2015-06-03 | 2018-04-03 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Host node device and methods for use therewith |
US9967002B2 (en) | 2015-06-03 | 2018-05-08 | At&T Intellectual I, Lp | Network termination and methods for use therewith |
US10797781B2 (en) | 2015-06-03 | 2020-10-06 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Client node device and methods for use therewith |
US10396887B2 (en) | 2015-06-03 | 2019-08-27 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Client node device and methods for use therewith |
US9912381B2 (en) | 2015-06-03 | 2018-03-06 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Network termination and methods for use therewith |
US9912382B2 (en) | 2015-06-03 | 2018-03-06 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Network termination and methods for use therewith |
US10050697B2 (en) | 2015-06-03 | 2018-08-14 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Host node device and methods for use therewith |
US10348391B2 (en) | 2015-06-03 | 2019-07-09 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Client node device with frequency conversion and methods for use therewith |
US10103801B2 (en) | 2015-06-03 | 2018-10-16 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Host node device and methods for use therewith |
US10812174B2 (en) | 2015-06-03 | 2020-10-20 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Client node device and methods for use therewith |
US9866309B2 (en) | 2015-06-03 | 2018-01-09 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Host node device and methods for use therewith |
US9913139B2 (en) | 2015-06-09 | 2018-03-06 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Signal fingerprinting for authentication of communicating devices |
US9997819B2 (en) | 2015-06-09 | 2018-06-12 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Transmission medium and method for facilitating propagation of electromagnetic waves via a core |
US10659212B2 (en) | 2015-06-11 | 2020-05-19 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Repeater and methods for use therewith |
US10110295B2 (en) * | 2015-06-11 | 2018-10-23 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Repeater and methods for use therewith |
US10341008B2 (en) | 2015-06-11 | 2019-07-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Repeater and methods for use therewith |
US10027398B2 (en) | 2015-06-11 | 2018-07-17 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Repeater and methods for use therewith |
US10142086B2 (en) | 2015-06-11 | 2018-11-27 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Repeater and methods for use therewith |
US10142010B2 (en) | 2015-06-11 | 2018-11-27 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Repeater and methods for use therewith |
US20170149489A1 (en) * | 2015-06-11 | 2017-05-25 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Repeater and methods for use therewith |
US10686516B2 (en) | 2015-06-11 | 2020-06-16 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Repeater and methods for use therewith |
US9608692B2 (en) * | 2015-06-11 | 2017-03-28 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Repeater and methods for use therewith |
US9820146B2 (en) | 2015-06-12 | 2017-11-14 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for authentication and identity management of communicating devices |
US9667317B2 (en) | 2015-06-15 | 2017-05-30 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for providing security using network traffic adjustments |
US9509415B1 (en) | 2015-06-25 | 2016-11-29 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Methods and apparatus for inducing a fundamental wave mode on a transmission medium |
US9787412B2 (en) | 2015-06-25 | 2017-10-10 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Methods and apparatus for inducing a fundamental wave mode on a transmission medium |
US10069185B2 (en) | 2015-06-25 | 2018-09-04 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Methods and apparatus for inducing a non-fundamental wave mode on a transmission medium |
US10090601B2 (en) | 2015-06-25 | 2018-10-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Waveguide system and methods for inducing a non-fundamental wave mode on a transmission medium |
US9865911B2 (en) | 2015-06-25 | 2018-01-09 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Waveguide system for slot radiating first electromagnetic waves that are combined into a non-fundamental wave mode second electromagnetic wave on a transmission medium |
US9882657B2 (en) | 2015-06-25 | 2018-01-30 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Methods and apparatus for inducing a fundamental wave mode on a transmission medium |
US9640850B2 (en) | 2015-06-25 | 2017-05-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Methods and apparatus for inducing a non-fundamental wave mode on a transmission medium |
US9628116B2 (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2017-04-18 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for transmitting wireless signals |
US10033108B2 (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2018-07-24 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for generating an electromagnetic wave having a wave mode that mitigates interference |
US9882257B2 (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2018-01-30 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for launching a wave mode that mitigates interference |
US9847566B2 (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2017-12-19 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for adjusting a field of a signal to mitigate interference |
US9722318B2 (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2017-08-01 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for coupling an antenna to a device |
US9947982B2 (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2018-04-17 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Dielectric transmission medium connector and methods for use therewith |
US10033107B2 (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2018-07-24 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for coupling an antenna to a device |
US10148016B2 (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2018-12-04 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for communicating utilizing an antenna array |
US9836957B2 (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2017-12-05 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for communicating with premises equipment |
US10044409B2 (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2018-08-07 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Transmission medium and methods for use therewith |
US10320586B2 (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2019-06-11 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for generating non-interfering electromagnetic waves on an insulated transmission medium |
US10341142B2 (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2019-07-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for generating non-interfering electromagnetic waves on an uninsulated conductor |
US9929755B2 (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2018-03-27 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for coupling an antenna to a device |
US9853342B2 (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2017-12-26 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Dielectric transmission medium connector and methods for use therewith |
US10205655B2 (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2019-02-12 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for communicating utilizing an antenna array and multiple communication paths |
US10170840B2 (en) | 2015-07-14 | 2019-01-01 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for sending or receiving electromagnetic signals |
US9793951B2 (en) | 2015-07-15 | 2017-10-17 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for launching a wave mode that mitigates interference |
US10090606B2 (en) | 2015-07-15 | 2018-10-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Antenna system with dielectric array and methods for use therewith |
US9608740B2 (en) | 2015-07-15 | 2017-03-28 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for launching a wave mode that mitigates interference |
US9806818B2 (en) | 2015-07-23 | 2017-10-31 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Node device, repeater and methods for use therewith |
US10074886B2 (en) | 2015-07-23 | 2018-09-11 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Dielectric transmission medium comprising a plurality of rigid dielectric members coupled together in a ball and socket configuration |
US10784670B2 (en) | 2015-07-23 | 2020-09-22 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Antenna support for aligning an antenna |
US9948333B2 (en) | 2015-07-23 | 2018-04-17 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for wireless communications to mitigate interference |
US9749053B2 (en) | 2015-07-23 | 2017-08-29 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Node device, repeater and methods for use therewith |
US9871283B2 (en) | 2015-07-23 | 2018-01-16 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Transmission medium having a dielectric core comprised of plural members connected by a ball and socket configuration |
US9912027B2 (en) | 2015-07-23 | 2018-03-06 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for exchanging communication signals |
US9461706B1 (en) | 2015-07-31 | 2016-10-04 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Method and apparatus for exchanging communication signals |
US9967173B2 (en) | 2015-07-31 | 2018-05-08 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for authentication and identity management of communicating devices |
US9735833B2 (en) | 2015-07-31 | 2017-08-15 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for communications management in a neighborhood network |
US9838078B2 (en) | 2015-07-31 | 2017-12-05 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for exchanging communication signals |
US10020587B2 (en) | 2015-07-31 | 2018-07-10 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Radial antenna and methods for use therewith |
US9904535B2 (en) | 2015-09-14 | 2018-02-27 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for distributing software |
US10009063B2 (en) | 2015-09-16 | 2018-06-26 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for use with a radio distributed antenna system having an out-of-band reference signal |
US10009901B2 (en) | 2015-09-16 | 2018-06-26 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method, apparatus, and computer-readable storage medium for managing utilization of wireless resources between base stations |
US10349418B2 (en) | 2015-09-16 | 2019-07-09 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for managing utilization of wireless resources via use of a reference signal to reduce distortion |
US10136434B2 (en) | 2015-09-16 | 2018-11-20 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for use with a radio distributed antenna system having an ultra-wideband control channel |
US10051629B2 (en) | 2015-09-16 | 2018-08-14 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for use with a radio distributed antenna system having an in-band reference signal |
US9705571B2 (en) | 2015-09-16 | 2017-07-11 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for use with a radio distributed antenna system |
US10225842B2 (en) | 2015-09-16 | 2019-03-05 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method, device and storage medium for communications using a modulated signal and a reference signal |
US10079661B2 (en) | 2015-09-16 | 2018-09-18 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for use with a radio distributed antenna system having a clock reference |
US9769128B2 (en) | 2015-09-28 | 2017-09-19 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for encryption of communications over a network |
US9843959B2 (en) * | 2015-09-30 | 2017-12-12 | Intel IP Corporation | Interference mitigation by a scalable digital wireless modem |
US20170094551A1 (en) * | 2015-09-30 | 2017-03-30 | Intel IP Corporation | Interference mitigation by a scalable digital wireless modem |
US9729197B2 (en) | 2015-10-01 | 2017-08-08 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for communicating network management traffic over a network |
US9876264B2 (en) | 2015-10-02 | 2018-01-23 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Communication system, guided wave switch and methods for use therewith |
US10074890B2 (en) | 2015-10-02 | 2018-09-11 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Communication device and antenna with integrated light assembly |
US9882277B2 (en) | 2015-10-02 | 2018-01-30 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Communication device and antenna assembly with actuated gimbal mount |
US10355367B2 (en) | 2015-10-16 | 2019-07-16 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Antenna structure for exchanging wireless signals |
US10665942B2 (en) | 2015-10-16 | 2020-05-26 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for adjusting wireless communications |
US10051483B2 (en) | 2015-10-16 | 2018-08-14 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for directing wireless signals |
US9912419B1 (en) | 2016-08-24 | 2018-03-06 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for managing a fault in a distributed antenna system |
US9860075B1 (en) | 2016-08-26 | 2018-01-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and communication node for broadband distribution |
US10291311B2 (en) | 2016-09-09 | 2019-05-14 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for mitigating a fault in a distributed antenna system |
US11032819B2 (en) | 2016-09-15 | 2021-06-08 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for use with a radio distributed antenna system having a control channel reference signal |
US10674526B2 (en) * | 2016-09-23 | 2020-06-02 | Wilson Electronics, Llc | Location based access to selected communication bands |
US11102801B2 (en) * | 2016-09-23 | 2021-08-24 | Wilson Electronics, Llc | Location based access to selected communication bands |
US20180092114A1 (en) * | 2016-09-23 | 2018-03-29 | Wilson Electronics, Llc | Location based access to selected communication bands |
EP3523890A4 (en) * | 2016-10-07 | 2020-05-20 | Wilson Electronics, LLC | Multi-amplifier repeaters for a wireless communication system |
US10135146B2 (en) | 2016-10-18 | 2018-11-20 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for launching guided waves via circuits |
US10135147B2 (en) | 2016-10-18 | 2018-11-20 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for launching guided waves via an antenna |
US10340600B2 (en) | 2016-10-18 | 2019-07-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for launching guided waves via plural waveguide systems |
US9991580B2 (en) | 2016-10-21 | 2018-06-05 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Launcher and coupling system for guided wave mode cancellation |
US9876605B1 (en) | 2016-10-21 | 2018-01-23 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Launcher and coupling system to support desired guided wave mode |
US10811767B2 (en) | 2016-10-21 | 2020-10-20 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and dielectric antenna with convex dielectric radome |
US10374316B2 (en) | 2016-10-21 | 2019-08-06 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System and dielectric antenna with non-uniform dielectric |
US10312567B2 (en) | 2016-10-26 | 2019-06-04 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Launcher with planar strip antenna and methods for use therewith |
US10340573B2 (en) | 2016-10-26 | 2019-07-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Launcher with cylindrical coupling device and methods for use therewith |
US10225025B2 (en) | 2016-11-03 | 2019-03-05 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for detecting a fault in a communication system |
US10224634B2 (en) | 2016-11-03 | 2019-03-05 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Methods and apparatus for adjusting an operational characteristic of an antenna |
US10498044B2 (en) | 2016-11-03 | 2019-12-03 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus for configuring a surface of an antenna |
US10291334B2 (en) | 2016-11-03 | 2019-05-14 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | System for detecting a fault in a communication system |
US10992371B2 (en) | 2016-11-15 | 2021-04-27 | Wilson Electronics, Llc | Desktop signal booster |
US11012143B2 (en) * | 2016-11-15 | 2021-05-18 | Wilson Electronics, Llc | Desktop signal booster |
US10673517B2 (en) | 2016-11-15 | 2020-06-02 | Wilson Electronics, Llc | Desktop signal booster |
US11095359B2 (en) | 2016-11-15 | 2021-08-17 | Wilson Electronics, Llc | Multiple antenna repeater architecture |
US20190140734A1 (en) * | 2016-11-15 | 2019-05-09 | Wilson Electronics, Llc | Desktop signal booster |
US10178445B2 (en) | 2016-11-23 | 2019-01-08 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Methods, devices, and systems for load balancing between a plurality of waveguides |
US10090594B2 (en) | 2016-11-23 | 2018-10-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Antenna system having structural configurations for assembly |
US10340601B2 (en) | 2016-11-23 | 2019-07-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Multi-antenna system and methods for use therewith |
US10340603B2 (en) | 2016-11-23 | 2019-07-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Antenna system having shielded structural configurations for assembly |
US10535928B2 (en) | 2016-11-23 | 2020-01-14 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Antenna system and methods for use therewith |
US10361489B2 (en) | 2016-12-01 | 2019-07-23 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Dielectric dish antenna system and methods for use therewith |
US10305190B2 (en) | 2016-12-01 | 2019-05-28 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Reflecting dielectric antenna system and methods for use therewith |
US10326494B2 (en) | 2016-12-06 | 2019-06-18 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus for measurement de-embedding and methods for use therewith |
US10382976B2 (en) | 2016-12-06 | 2019-08-13 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for managing wireless communications based on communication paths and network device positions |
US10439675B2 (en) | 2016-12-06 | 2019-10-08 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for repeating guided wave communication signals |
US10135145B2 (en) | 2016-12-06 | 2018-11-20 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for generating an electromagnetic wave along a transmission medium |
US10755542B2 (en) | 2016-12-06 | 2020-08-25 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for surveillance via guided wave communication |
US10727599B2 (en) | 2016-12-06 | 2020-07-28 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Launcher with slot antenna and methods for use therewith |
US10020844B2 (en) | 2016-12-06 | 2018-07-10 | T&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for broadcast communication via guided waves |
US10637149B2 (en) | 2016-12-06 | 2020-04-28 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Injection molded dielectric antenna and methods for use therewith |
US10694379B2 (en) | 2016-12-06 | 2020-06-23 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Waveguide system with device-based authentication and methods for use therewith |
US10819035B2 (en) | 2016-12-06 | 2020-10-27 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Launcher with helical antenna and methods for use therewith |
US9927517B1 (en) | 2016-12-06 | 2018-03-27 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for sensing rainfall |
US10547348B2 (en) | 2016-12-07 | 2020-01-28 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for switching transmission mediums in a communication system |
US10446936B2 (en) | 2016-12-07 | 2019-10-15 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Multi-feed dielectric antenna system and methods for use therewith |
US10359749B2 (en) | 2016-12-07 | 2019-07-23 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for utilities management via guided wave communication |
US10389029B2 (en) | 2016-12-07 | 2019-08-20 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Multi-feed dielectric antenna system with core selection and methods for use therewith |
US9893795B1 (en) | 2016-12-07 | 2018-02-13 | At&T Intellectual Property I, Lp | Method and repeater for broadband distribution |
US10168695B2 (en) | 2016-12-07 | 2019-01-01 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for controlling an unmanned aircraft |
US10139820B2 (en) | 2016-12-07 | 2018-11-27 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for deploying equipment of a communication system |
US10243270B2 (en) | 2016-12-07 | 2019-03-26 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Beam adaptive multi-feed dielectric antenna system and methods for use therewith |
US10027397B2 (en) | 2016-12-07 | 2018-07-17 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Distributed antenna system and methods for use therewith |
US10916969B2 (en) | 2016-12-08 | 2021-02-09 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for providing power using an inductive coupling |
US10938108B2 (en) | 2016-12-08 | 2021-03-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Frequency selective multi-feed dielectric antenna system and methods for use therewith |
US10069535B2 (en) | 2016-12-08 | 2018-09-04 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for launching electromagnetic waves having a certain electric field structure |
US10777873B2 (en) | 2016-12-08 | 2020-09-15 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for mounting network devices |
US10389037B2 (en) | 2016-12-08 | 2019-08-20 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for selecting sections of an antenna array and use therewith |
US9911020B1 (en) | 2016-12-08 | 2018-03-06 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for tracking via a radio frequency identification device |
US10326689B2 (en) | 2016-12-08 | 2019-06-18 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and system for providing alternative communication paths |
US9998870B1 (en) | 2016-12-08 | 2018-06-12 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for proximity sensing |
US10103422B2 (en) | 2016-12-08 | 2018-10-16 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for mounting network devices |
US10530505B2 (en) | 2016-12-08 | 2020-01-07 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for launching electromagnetic waves along a transmission medium |
US10411356B2 (en) | 2016-12-08 | 2019-09-10 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for selectively targeting communication devices with an antenna array |
US10601494B2 (en) | 2016-12-08 | 2020-03-24 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Dual-band communication device and method for use therewith |
US9838896B1 (en) | 2016-12-09 | 2017-12-05 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for assessing network coverage |
US10340983B2 (en) | 2016-12-09 | 2019-07-02 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Method and apparatus for surveying remote sites via guided wave communications |
US10264586B2 (en) | 2016-12-09 | 2019-04-16 | At&T Mobility Ii Llc | Cloud-based packet controller and methods for use therewith |
US9973940B1 (en) | 2017-02-27 | 2018-05-15 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus and methods for dynamic impedance matching of a guided wave launcher |
US10298293B2 (en) | 2017-03-13 | 2019-05-21 | At&T Intellectual Property I, L.P. | Apparatus of communication utilizing wireless network devices |
Also Published As
Publication number | Publication date |
---|---|
CA2537474A1 (en) | 2005-03-17 |
JP2007532038A (en) | 2007-11-08 |
AU2010249286A1 (en) | 2011-01-06 |
WO2005025078A2 (en) | 2005-03-17 |
CN101454998A (en) | 2009-06-10 |
AU2010249288A1 (en) | 2011-01-06 |
EP1668781A4 (en) | 2010-09-01 |
KR20060108610A (en) | 2006-10-18 |
EP1668781A2 (en) | 2006-06-14 |
ES2540250T3 (en) | 2015-07-09 |
EP1668781B1 (en) | 2015-04-08 |
WO2005025078A3 (en) | 2008-10-23 |
RU2387075C2 (en) | 2010-04-20 |
RU2006110628A (en) | 2007-10-20 |
AU2004303118A1 (en) | 2005-03-17 |
US9130641B2 (en) | 2015-09-08 |
AU2010249287A1 (en) | 2011-01-06 |
KR100974456B1 (en) | 2010-08-06 |
BRPI0414099A (en) | 2006-10-31 |
Similar Documents
Publication | Publication Date | Title |
---|---|---|
US9130641B2 (en) | Short-range cellular booster | |
US7519323B2 (en) | Short-range cellular booster | |
US8086174B2 (en) | Short-range cellular booster | |
EP1985056B1 (en) | Short range booster | |
JP3840617B2 (en) | Telecommunications network with time-orthogonal broadband and narrowband systems | |
WO2012009574A1 (en) | Method in a wireless repeater employing an antenna array including vertical and horizontal feeds for interference reduction | |
Dawy et al. | Coverage and capacity enhancement of CDMA cellular systems via multihop transmission | |
Meng et al. | Fixed full duplex relaying for wireless broadband communication | |
Hassan et al. | Performance analysis of a CDMA wireless local loop systems | |
WO2001052581A1 (en) | Indoor wireless communication system with cancellation of interference |
Legal Events
Date | Code | Title | Description |
---|---|---|---|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: NEXTIVITY, INC., CALIFORNIA Free format text: ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:MOHEBBI, BEHZAD;REEL/FRAME:019024/0844 Effective date: 20070130 |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: VENTURE LENDING & LEASING IV, INC., CALIFORNIA Free format text: SECURITY AGREEMENT;ASSIGNOR:NEXTIVITY, INC.;REEL/FRAME:021193/0320 Effective date: 20080530 Owner name: VENTURE LENDING & LEASING V, INC., CALIFORNIA Free format text: SECURITY AGREEMENT;ASSIGNOR:NEXTIVITY, INC.;REEL/FRAME:021193/0320 Effective date: 20080530 Owner name: VENTURE LENDING & LEASING IV, INC.,CALIFORNIA Free format text: SECURITY AGREEMENT;ASSIGNOR:NEXTIVITY, INC.;REEL/FRAME:021193/0320 Effective date: 20080530 Owner name: VENTURE LENDING & LEASING V, INC.,CALIFORNIA Free format text: SECURITY AGREEMENT;ASSIGNOR:NEXTIVITY, INC.;REEL/FRAME:021193/0320 Effective date: 20080530 |
|
STCF | Information on status: patent grant |
Free format text: PATENTED CASE |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: VENTURE LENDING & LEASING VII, INC., CALIFORNIA Free format text: SECURITY INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:NEXTIVITY, INC.;REEL/FRAME:041306/0273 Effective date: 20161220 Owner name: VENTURE LENDING & LEASING VIII, INC., CALIFORNIA Free format text: SECURITY INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:NEXTIVITY, INC.;REEL/FRAME:041306/0273 Effective date: 20161220 |
|
MAFP | Maintenance fee payment |
Free format text: PAYMENT OF MAINTENANCE FEE, 4TH YR, SMALL ENTITY (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: M2551); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: SMALL ENTITY Year of fee payment: 4 |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: LIVE OAK BANKING COMPANY, NORTH CAROLINA Free format text: SECURITY INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:NEXTIVITY, INC.;REEL/FRAME:054711/0816 Effective date: 20201211 |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: NEXTIVITY, INC., CALIFORNIA Free format text: RELEASE BY SECURED PARTY;ASSIGNORS:VENTURE LENDING & LEASING VII, INC.;VENTURE LENDING & LEASING VIII, INC.;REEL/FRAME:054863/0645 Effective date: 20201211 |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: NEXTIVITY, INC., CALIFORNIA Free format text: RELEASE BY SECURED PARTY;ASSIGNORS:VENTURE LENDING & LEASING IV, INC.;VENTURE LENDING & LEASING V, INC.;REEL/FRAME:062180/0367 Effective date: 20221215 |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: JPMORGAN CHASE BANK, N.A., NEW YORK Free format text: SECURITY INTEREST;ASSIGNOR:NEXTIVITY, INC.;REEL/FRAME:062213/0590 Effective date: 20221222 |
|
AS | Assignment |
Owner name: NEXTIVITY, INC., CALIFORNIA Free format text: RELEASE BY SECURED PARTY;ASSIGNORS:VENTURE LENDING & LEASING IV, INC;VENTURE LENDING & LEASING V, INC.;REEL/FRAME:062222/0056 Effective date: 20221227 |
|
MAFP | Maintenance fee payment |
Free format text: PAYMENT OF MAINTENANCE FEE, 8TH YR, SMALL ENTITY (ORIGINAL EVENT CODE: M2552); ENTITY STATUS OF PATENT OWNER: SMALL ENTITY Year of fee payment: 8 |